EPOCH 650 Ultrasonic Flaw Detector

EPOCH 650
Ultrasonic Flaw Detector
User’s Manual
DMTA-10055-01EN — Rev. A
February 2015
This instruction manual contains essential information on how to use this Olympus product safely and effectively.
Before using this product, thoroughly review this instruction manual. Use the product as instructed.
Keep this instruction manual in a safe, accessible location.
Olympus Scientific Solutions Americas, 48 Woerd Avenue, Waltham, MA 02453,
USA
Copyright © 2015 by Olympus. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may
be reproduced, translated, or distributed without the express written permission of
Olympus.
This document was prepared with particular attention to usage to ensure the
accuracy of the information contained therein, and corresponds to the version of
the product manufactured prior to the date appearing on the title page. There
could, however, be some differences between the manual and the product if the
product was modified thereafter.
The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice.
Part number: DMTA-10055-01EN
Rev. A
February 2015
Printed in the United States of America
SD, miniSD, and microSD Logos are trademarks of SD-3D, LLC.
All brands are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners and
third party entities.
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Table of Contents
List of Abbreviations ....................................................................................... xi
Labels and Symbols ........................................................................................... 1
Important Information — Please Read Before Use ..................................... 5
Intended Use .......................................................................................................................... 5
Instruction Manual ................................................................................................................ 5
Instrument Compatibility ..................................................................................................... 6
Repair and Modification ....................................................................................................... 6
Safety Symbols ....................................................................................................................... 7
Safety Signal Words ............................................................................................................... 7
Note Signal Words ................................................................................................................. 8
Safety ....................................................................................................................................... 9
Warnings ................................................................................................................................. 9
Battery Precautions .............................................................................................................. 10
Equipment Disposal ............................................................................................................ 11
CE (European Community) ............................................................................................... 11
WEEE Directive .................................................................................................................... 11
China RoHS .......................................................................................................................... 12
Korea Communications Commission (KCC) ................................................................... 12
EMC Directive Compliance ................................................................................................ 12
FCC (USA) Compliance ...................................................................................................... 12
ICES-001 (Canada) Compliance ........................................................................................ 13
Warranty Information ......................................................................................................... 13
Technical Support ................................................................................................................ 14
Introduction ...................................................................................................... 15
Package Content .................................................................................................................. 16
Table of Contents
iii
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
1. Hardware Overview .................................................................................. 19
1.1
Front Panel .................................................................................................................
1.1.1
Adjustment Knob Configuration .................................................................
1.1.2
Navigation Pad Configuration .....................................................................
1.1.3
Direct-Access Keys .........................................................................................
1.1.4
Function and Parameter Keys ......................................................................
1.1.5
Power Indicator ..............................................................................................
1.1.6
Alarm Indicators ............................................................................................
1.2 Connectors .................................................................................................................
1.2.1
Transducer Connectors ..................................................................................
1.2.2
Digital Out Connector ...................................................................................
1.2.2.1
Alarm Output Connector Pins ..........................................................
1.2.2.2
Serial Communication Pins ................................................................
1.2.2.3
Encoder Input Pins ..............................................................................
1.2.2.4
Trigger Input and Output Pins ..........................................................
1.2.3
VGA Out Connector ......................................................................................
1.2.4
USB Client Port and microSD Card Slot .....................................................
1.2.4.1
USB Client Port ....................................................................................
1.2.4.2
microSD Card Slot ...............................................................................
1.3 Battery Compartment ...............................................................................................
1.4 Instrument Stand .......................................................................................................
20
22
25
28
30
32
32
33
33
34
35
35
35
36
36
37
38
39
40
41
2. Powering the EPOCH 650 ......................................................................... 43
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
Lithium-Ion Battery ..................................................................................................
AC Charger/Adaptor ................................................................................................
Standalone Battery Charger ....................................................................................
Power Status Indicators ............................................................................................
44
45
47
47
3. Software Overview .................................................................................... 49
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
3.9
iv
Choosing a Function Menu Item ............................................................................
Parameter Selection ...................................................................................................
Convention for Identifying Menu Items and Parameters ...................................
Parameter Adjustment .............................................................................................
Escape Key .................................................................................................................
Lock Key .....................................................................................................................
AUTO XX% Feature ..................................................................................................
Submenus ...................................................................................................................
Pulser and Receiver Settings ...................................................................................
3.9.1
Sensitivity ........................................................................................................
3.9.2
Reference Gain ................................................................................................
3.9.3
Pulser ...............................................................................................................
Table of Contents
50
51
52
52
53
53
54
54
55
55
55
56
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
3.9.4
Receiver ...........................................................................................................
3.10 Gates ...........................................................................................................................
3.10.1 Quickly Adjusting Basic Gate Parameters ..................................................
3.10.2 Gate 1 and Gate 2 ...........................................................................................
3.10.3 Gate Setup .......................................................................................................
3.10.4 Gate Alarm Indications .................................................................................
3.11 Calibration .................................................................................................................
3.11.1 Measurement calibration ..............................................................................
3.11.2 Angle Beam Calibration ................................................................................
3.12 Data Logger ...............................................................................................................
3.12.1 Calibration Files .............................................................................................
3.12.2 Resetting the Instrument ...............................................................................
56
58
58
59
59
61
62
62
67
68
68
70
4. Software Interface ...................................................................................... 73
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.8
Button Types .............................................................................................................. 74
File Identifier and Message Bars ............................................................................. 75
Direct-Access Parameters ........................................................................................ 76
Measurement Reading Boxes .................................................................................. 77
Live-Scan Area .......................................................................................................... 78
Flags ............................................................................................................................ 78
Menu Contents .......................................................................................................... 82
Setup Pages ................................................................................................................ 86
4.8.1
Entering an Alphanumeric Value Using the Virtual Keyboard .............. 87
4.8.2
Display Setup Page ........................................................................................ 89
4.8.3
Grid Setup Page .............................................................................................. 91
4.8.4
Reading Setup Page ....................................................................................... 91
4.8.5
General Setup Page ........................................................................................ 95
4.8.6
About Page ...................................................................................................... 98
4.8.7
Clock Setup Page ............................................................................................ 99
4.8.8
Software Options Setup Page ..................................................................... 100
4.8.9
Misc Setup Page ........................................................................................... 100
4.8.10 Editable Parameters Page ............................................................................ 102
4.8.11 Analog Output Setup Page ......................................................................... 104
5. Adjusting the Pulser/Receiver ............................................................... 105
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
Adjusting the System Sensitivity (Gain) ..............................................................
Using the AUTO XX% Feature .............................................................................
Setting Reference Gain and Scanning Gain ........................................................
Pulser Adjustments ................................................................................................
5.4.1
Pulse Repetition Frequency (PRF) .............................................................
5.4.2
Pulse Energy (Voltage) ................................................................................
Table of Contents
105
105
106
107
107
108
v
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
5.4.3
Damping ........................................................................................................
5.4.4
Test Mode ......................................................................................................
5.4.5
Pulser Type ....................................................................................................
5.4.6
Pulser Frequency Selection (Pulse Width) ................................................
5.5 Receiver Adjustments .............................................................................................
5.5.1
Digital Receiver Filters ................................................................................
5.5.2
Waveform Rectification ...............................................................................
109
109
110
111
111
111
113
6. Managing Special Waveform Functions .............................................. 115
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.6
Reject .........................................................................................................................
Peak Memory ...........................................................................................................
Peak Hold .................................................................................................................
Freeze ........................................................................................................................
Grid Modes ..............................................................................................................
Baseline Break ..........................................................................................................
115
116
118
118
119
122
7. Gates ........................................................................................................... 123
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5
7.6
7.7
7.8
Measurement Gates 1 and 2 ..................................................................................
Quickly Adjusting Basic Gate Parameters ...........................................................
Gate Measurement Modes .....................................................................................
Viewing Measurement Readings ..........................................................................
Gate Tracking and Echo-to-Echo Measurements ...............................................
Operating in Time-of-Flight Mode .......................................................................
Zooming on a Gate .................................................................................................
Gate Alarms .............................................................................................................
7.8.1
Threshold Alarms ........................................................................................
7.8.2
Minimum Depth Alarm ..............................................................................
7.8.3
Minimum Depth Alarm with a Single Gate .............................................
7.8.4
Minimum Depth Alarm with Gate Tracking ...........................................
123
125
126
130
130
132
132
133
133
134
134
135
8. Programmable Inputs and Outputs ...................................................... 137
8.1
8.2
8.3
8.4
8.5
Alarm Outputs ........................................................................................................
Serial/USB Command Protocol .............................................................................
Trigger Inputs and Outputs ...................................................................................
Encoder Inputs ........................................................................................................
Analog Output ........................................................................................................
137
137
138
139
139
9. Calibration ................................................................................................. 143
9.1
9.2
vi
Basic Setup ............................................................................................................... 143
Calibration Modes ................................................................................................... 144
9.2.1
Straight Beam Modes ................................................................................... 145
Table of Contents
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
9.2.2
Angle Beam Modes ......................................................................................
Calibrating with a Straight Beam Transducer ....................................................
Calibrating with a Delay Line Transducer ..........................................................
Calibrating on a Single Test Block of Known Thickness ...................................
Calibrating with a Dual Element Transducer .....................................................
Calibrating in Echo-to-Echo Mode .......................................................................
Calibrating to Known Sound Path Values with an Angle Beam Transducer .
9.8.1
Locating the Beam Index Point ..................................................................
9.8.2
Verifying the Refracted Angle ....................................................................
9.8.3
Calibrating for Distance ..............................................................................
9.8.4
Calibrating for Sensitivity ...........................................................................
9.9 Calibrating to Known Depth Values with an Angle Beam Transducer ..........
9.10 Curved Surface Correction ....................................................................................
9.11 Common Angle Beam Calibration Block Diagrams ..........................................
9.3
9.4
9.5
9.6
9.7
9.8
145
146
150
156
156
161
165
165
167
169
173
175
180
181
10. Data Logger ............................................................................................... 187
10.1 Data File Types ........................................................................................................
10.1.1 Calibration file type .....................................................................................
10.1.2 Incremental file type ....................................................................................
10.1.3 Advanced File Types ...................................................................................
10.1.3.1 Sequential ...........................................................................................
10.1.3.2 Sequential with Custom Points .......................................................
10.1.3.3 2-D Matrix Grid .................................................................................
10.1.3.4 2-D EPRI .............................................................................................
10.1.3.5 2-D Matrix Grid with Custom Point ...............................................
10.1.3.6 3-D Matrix Grid .................................................................................
10.1.3.7 Boiler ...................................................................................................
10.2 Data Logger Storage Capacity ..............................................................................
10.3 Saving Data to Files ................................................................................................
10.4 Data Logger Menus ................................................................................................
10.4.1 File Menu .......................................................................................................
10.4.1.1 Create ..................................................................................................
10.4.1.2 Open ....................................................................................................
10.4.1.3 Quick Recall .......................................................................................
10.4.1.4 Memo ..................................................................................................
10.4.1.5 Last ID and Select ID ........................................................................
10.4.2 Manage Menu ...............................................................................................
10.4.2.1 Reset ....................................................................................................
10.4.2.2 Export ..................................................................................................
10.4.2.3 Import .................................................................................................
10.4.2.4 Edit ......................................................................................................
10.4.2.5 Copy ....................................................................................................
Table of Contents
188
188
188
188
189
189
189
189
189
189
190
190
190
191
191
192
197
204
205
207
208
209
210
211
213
214
vii
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
10.4.2.6 Delete ...................................................................................................
10.4.2.7 Import Memo .....................................................................................
10.5 Grid View .................................................................................................................
10.5.1 Activating Grid View ...................................................................................
10.5.2 Configuring the Grid View .........................................................................
10.5.3 Using the Grid ..............................................................................................
10.6 Screen Capture ........................................................................................................
10.7 Video Record ...........................................................................................................
10.7.1 Activating the video recorder .....................................................................
10.7.2 Using the video recorder .............................................................................
215
216
217
217
217
218
221
221
221
221
11. Software Features and Options ............................................................. 225
11.1 Defining Licensed and Unlicensed Software Features ......................................
11.2 Dynamic DAC/TCG ................................................................................................
11.2.1 Feature Activation and Reference Correct ................................................
11.2.2 Standard/ASME III DAC/TCG ...................................................................
11.2.3 Gain Adjustment Options ...........................................................................
11.2.3.1 Scanning Gain ....................................................................................
11.2.3.2 Curve Adjustment Gain (DAC Gain or TCG Gain) ......................
11.2.3.3 Transfer Correction ...........................................................................
11.2.4 JIS DAC ..........................................................................................................
11.2.5 Custom DAC Curves ...................................................................................
11.3 DGS/AVG .................................................................................................................
11.3.1 Option Activation and Setup ......................................................................
11.3.2 Curve Adjustment Options .........................................................................
11.3.3 Transfer Correction ......................................................................................
11.3.4 DGS/AVG Curve Gain .................................................................................
11.3.5 Registration Level Adjustment ...................................................................
11.3.6 Relative Attenuation Measurement ...........................................................
11.4 AWS D1.1/D1.5 Weld Rating Software ................................................................
11.4.1 Activating the AWS D1.1 software option ................................................
11.4.2 Adjusting the AWS Reference Level ..........................................................
11.4.3 Storing the Gated Reflector .........................................................................
11.4.4 Scanning Gain ...............................................................................................
11.4.5 Calculating A and C Values ........................................................................
11.5 API 5UE ....................................................................................................................
11.5.1 Option Activation and Setup ......................................................................
11.5.2 Envelope Mode .............................................................................................
11.5.2.1 Envelope Mode Calibration .............................................................
11.5.2.2 Crack Sizing .......................................................................................
11.5.3 Manual Mode ................................................................................................
11.5.3.1 Manual Mode Calibration ................................................................
viii
Table of Contents
225
226
227
229
234
234
236
237
238
238
240
241
246
246
247
248
249
249
250
251
252
253
254
254
256
258
258
259
261
261
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
11.5.3.2 Crack Sizing .......................................................................................
11.6 Waveform Averaging .............................................................................................
11.6.1 Waveform Averaging Setup .......................................................................
11.6.2 Using Waveform Averaging .......................................................................
11.7 Back Wall Echo Attenuator ....................................................................................
11.8 Interface Gate ...........................................................................................................
11.8.1 Activating the Interface Gate ......................................................................
11.8.2 Adjusting the interface gate ........................................................................
11.8.3 Setting the Material Velocity ......................................................................
11.8.4 Using Run Mode ..........................................................................................
11.8.5 Interface Gate Compatibility ......................................................................
11.8.6 Gate Measurements and Alarms ...............................................................
11.9 Corrosion Module ...................................................................................................
11.9.1 Key Features .................................................................................................
11.9.2 Corrosion Module Screen ...........................................................................
11.9.3 Corrosion Module Activation and Setup .................................................
11.9.4 Basic Measurement Adjustments ..............................................................
11.9.4.1 Rectification ........................................................................................
11.9.4.2 Extended Blank Control ...................................................................
11.9.4.3 Manual Gain Adjustment ................................................................
11.9.5 Calibration for Additional Accuracy ........................................................
11.9.6 Echo-to-Echo Measurements ......................................................................
11.9.7 B-Scan ............................................................................................................
11.9.7.1 Activating the B-Scan ........................................................................
11.9.7.2 B-Scan Setup Page .............................................................................
11.9.7.3 B-Scan Acquisition and Control ......................................................
11.9.7.4 Viewing the B-Scan in the Data Logger .........................................
11.10 Template Storage .....................................................................................................
264
265
266
266
268
271
271
271
272
272
274
275
275
275
276
278
280
280
280
281
283
283
285
286
287
289
290
292
12. Maintenance and Troubleshooting ...................................................... 297
12.1
12.2
12.3
12.4
12.5
12.6
Replacing the Battery .............................................................................................
Instrument Cleaning ...............................................................................................
Verifying O-Ring Gaskets and Seals ....................................................................
Protecting the Display ............................................................................................
Annual Calibration .................................................................................................
Troubleshooting ......................................................................................................
297
298
298
299
299
299
13. Specifications ............................................................................................ 301
13.1 General and Environmental Specifications ......................................................... 301
13.2 Channel Specifications ........................................................................................... 303
13.3 Input/Output Specifications .................................................................................. 305
Table of Contents
ix
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Appendix A: Sound Velocities .................................................................... 307
Appendix B: Data File Types ....................................................................... 309
B.1
B.2
B.3
Calibration file type ................................................................................................
Incremental file type ...............................................................................................
Advanced File Types ..............................................................................................
B.3.1
Sequential ......................................................................................................
B.3.2
2-D Matrix Grid ............................................................................................
B.3.3
2-D EPRI ........................................................................................................
B.3.4
2-D Matrix Grid with Custom Point ..........................................................
B.3.5
3-D Matrix Grid ............................................................................................
B.3.6
Boiler ..............................................................................................................
309
309
312
312
314
317
317
318
319
Appendix C: Glossary ................................................................................... 321
Appendix D: Parts List .................................................................................. 331
List of Figures ................................................................................................. 335
List of Tables ................................................................................................... 341
Index ................................................................................................................. 343
x
Table of Contents
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
List of Abbreviations
AC
ACT
ADDT
AGC
API
ASME
AVG
AWS
BEA
BIP
CSC
DAC
DC
DGS
EFUP
FSH
ID
IF
IIW
JIS
LCD
MEM
NDT
OS
PK
PRF
SDH
TCG
Trig
USB
VGA
alternating current
amplitude comparison technique
amplitude-distance differential technique
automatic gain compensation
American Petroleum Institute
American Society of Mechanical Engineers
abstand verstärkung größe
American Welding Society
back wall echo attenuator
beam index point
curved surface correction
distance amplitude correction
direct current
distance gain size
environment-friendly use period
full-screen height
identifier
interface gate
International Institute of Welding
Japanese Industrial Standard
liquid crystal display
memory
non-destructive testing
overshoot
peak
pulse repetition frequency
side-drilled hole
time-corrected gain
trigonometry
universal serial bus
video graphics adapter
List of Abbreviations
xi
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
xii
List of Abbreviations
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Labels and Symbols
Safety-related labels and symbols are attached to the instrument at the locations
shown in Figure i-1 on page 1, Figure i-2 on page 2, and Figure i-3 on page 2. If any or
all of the labels or symbols are missing or illegible, please contact Olympus.
Location of rating label
(see Table 1 on page 3)
Figure i-1 Labels location
Labels and Symbols
1
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Serial number location (see Table 2 on page 4)
Figure i-2 Location of the serial number
CAUTION
To avoid the risk of electric shock, do not touch the inner conductor of the BNC (or
LEMO) connectors. Up to 400 V can be present on the inner conductors. The warning
symbol shown in Figure i-3 on page 2 warns of this electric shock risk.
Warning symbol
BNC connector inner conductor
(LEMO 01 series also available)
Figure i-3 Warning symbol
2
Labels and Symbols
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Table 1 Rating label and regulatory screen content
Content
This symbol indicates the location of the membrane vent.
The direct current symbol.
The WEEE symbol indicates that the product must not be
disposed of as unsorted municipal waste, but should be
collected separately.
The regulatory compliance mark (RCM) label indicates that
the product complies with all applicable standards, and has
been registered with the Australian Communications and
Media Authority (ACMA) for placement on the Australian
market.
Seller and user shall be noticed that this equipment is suitable
for electromagnetic equipment for office work (class A) and it
can be used outside home.
The MSIP code for the EPOCH 650 is the following: MSIPREM-OYN-EP650.
Labels and Symbols
3
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Table 1 Rating label and regulatory screen content (continued)
The CE marking is a declaration that this product conforms to
all the applicable directives of the European Community. See
the Declaration of Conformity for details. Contact your Olympus
representative for more information.
The China RoHS mark indicates the product’s EnvironmentFriendly Use Period (EFUP). The EFUP is defined as the
number of years for which listed controlled substances will not
leak or chemically deteriorate while in the product. The EFUP
for the EPOCH 650 has been determined to be 15 years. Note:
The Environment-Friendly Use Period (EFUP) is not meant to
be interpreted as the period assuring functionality and
product performance.
Table 2 Serial number label content
Content
SERIAL
4
The serial number.
Labels and Symbols
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Important Information — Please Read Before Use
Intended Use
The EPOCH 650 ultrasonic flaw detector is designed to perform nondestructive
inspections on industrial and commercial materials.
WARNING
Do not use the EPOCH 650 for any purpose other than its intended use. It must never
be used to inspect or examine human or animal body parts.
Instruction Manual
This instruction manual contains essential information on how to use this Olympus
product safely and effectively. Before using this product, thoroughly review this
instruction manual. Use the product as instructed.
Keep this instruction manual in a safe, accessible location.
Important Information — Please Read Before Use
5
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
IMPORTANT
Some of the details of components illustrated in this manual may differ from the
components installed on your instrument. However, the operating principles remain
the same.
Instrument Compatibility
Only use EPOCH 650 ultrasonic flaw detector with the following ancillary
equipment:
•
Rechargeable lithium-ion (Li-ion) battery pack (PN: 600-BAT-L-3 [U8051431])
•
Optional standalone external battery charger (PN: EPXT-EC-x). Varies by
configuration; must select a power cord.
•
Charger/adaptor (PN: EP-MCA-x) Varies by configuration; must select a power
cord.
CAUTION
Always use equipment and accessories that meet Olympus specifications. Using
incompatible equipment could cause equipment malfunction and/or damage, or
human injury.
Repair and Modification
The EPOCH 650 does not contain any user-serviceable parts. Opening the instrument
might void the warranty.
6
Important Information — Please Read Before Use
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
CAUTION
In order to prevent human injury and/or equipment damage, do not disassemble,
modify, or attempt to repair the instrument.
Safety Symbols
The following safety symbols might appear on the instrument and in the instruction
manual:
General warning symbol
This symbol is used to alert the user to potential hazards. All safety messages that
follow this symbol shall be obeyed to avoid possible harm or material damage.
High voltage warning symbol
This symbol is used to alert the user to potential electric shock hazards greater
than 1000 volts. All safety messages that follow this symbol shall be obeyed to
avoid possible harm.
Safety Signal Words
The following safety symbols might appear in the documentation of the instrument:
DANGER
The DANGER signal word indicates an imminently hazardous situation. It calls
attention to a procedure, practice, or the like, which, if not correctly performed or
adhered to, will result in death or serious personal injury. Do not proceed beyond a
DANGER signal word until the indicated conditions are fully understood and met.
Important Information — Please Read Before Use
7
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
WARNING
The WARNING signal word indicates a potentially hazardous situation. It calls
attention to a procedure, practice, or the like, which, if not correctly performed or
adhered to, could result in death or serious personal injury. Do not proceed beyond a
WARNING signal word until the indicated conditions are fully understood and met.
CAUTION
The CAUTION signal word indicates a potentially hazardous situation. It calls
attention to an operating procedure, practice, or the like, which, if not correctly
performed or adhered to, may result in minor or moderate personal injury, material
damage, particularly to the product, destruction of part or all of the product, or loss of
data. Do not proceed beyond a CAUTION signal word until the indicated conditions
are fully understood and met.
Note Signal Words
The following safety symbols could appear in the documentation of the instrument:
IMPORTANT
The IMPORTANT signal word calls attention to a note that provides important
information, or information essential to the completion of a task.
NOTE
The NOTE signal word calls attention to an operating procedure, practice, or the like,
which requires special attention. A note also denotes related parenthetical
information that is useful, but not imperative.
TIP
The TIP signal word calls attention to a type of note that helps you apply the
techniques and procedures described in the manual to your specific needs, or
provides hints on how to effectively use the capabilities of the product.
8
Important Information — Please Read Before Use
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Safety
Before turning on the instrument, verify that the correct safety precautions have been
taken (see the following warnings). In addition, note the external markings on the
instrument, which are described under “Safety Symbols.”
Warnings
WARNING
General Warnings
•
Carefully read the instructions contained in this instruction manual prior to
turning on the instrument.
•
Keep this instruction manual in a safe place for further reference.
•
Follow the installation and operation procedures.
•
It is imperative to respect the safety warnings on the instrument and in this
instruction manual.
•
If the equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the
protection provided by the equipment could be impaired.
•
Do not install substitute parts or perform any unauthorized modification to the
instrument.
•
Service instructions, when applicable, are for trained service personnel. To avoid
the risk of electric shock, do not perform any work on the instrument unless
qualified to do so. For any problem or question regarding this instrument, contact
Olympus or an authorized Olympus representative.
•
Do not touch the connectors directly by hand. Otherwise, a malfunction or electric
shock may result.
•
Do not allow metallic or foreign objects to enter the device through connectors or
any other openings. Otherwise, a malfunction or electric shock may result.
Important Information — Please Read Before Use
9
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
WARNING
Electrical Warning
The instrument must only be connected to a power source corresponding to the type
indicated on the rating label.
CAUTION
If a non-approved power supply cord not dedicated to Olympus products is used,
Olympus will not be able to ensure the electrical safety of the equipment.
Battery Precautions
CAUTION
10
•
Before disposing of a battery, check your local laws, rules, and regulations, and
follow them accordingly.
•
Transportation of lithium-ion batteries is regulated by the United Nations under
the United Nations Recommendations on the Transport of Dangerous Goods. It is
expected that governments, intergovernmental organizations, and other
international organizations shall conform to the principles laid down in these
regulations, thus contributing to worldwide harmonization in this field. These
international organizations include the International Civil Aviation organization
(ICAO), the International Air Transport Association (IATA), the International
Maritime Organization (IMO), the US Department of Transportation (USDOT),
Transport Canada (TC), and others. Please contact the transporter and confirm
current regulations before transportation of lithium-ion batteries.
•
Do not open, crush, or perforate batteries; doing so could cause injury.
•
Do not incinerate batteries. Keep batteries away from fire and other sources of
extreme heat. Exposing batteries to extreme heat (over 80 °C) could result in an
explosion or personal injury.
•
Do not drop, hit, or otherwise abuse a battery, as doing so could expose the cell
contents, which are corrosive and explosive.
•
Do not short-circuit the battery terminals. A short circuit could cause injury and
severe damage to a battery making it unusable.
Important Information — Please Read Before Use
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
•
Do not expose a battery to moisture or rain; doing so could cause an electric
shock.
•
Only use the EPOCH 650 unit with an external charger approved by Olympus to
charge the batteries.
•
Only use batteries supplied by Olympus.
•
Do not store batteries that have less than 40 % remaining charge. Recharge
batteries to between 40 % and 80 % capacity before storing them.
•
During storage, keep the battery charge between 40 % and 80 %.
•
Do not leave batteries in the EPOCH 650 unit during instrument storage.
Equipment Disposal
Before disposing of the EPOCH 650, check your local laws, rules, and regulations, and
follow them accordingly.
CE (European Community)
This device complies with the requirements of both directive
2004/108/EC concerning electromagnetic compatibility and directive
2006/95/EC concerning low voltage. The CE marking indicates
compliance with the above directives.
WEEE Directive
In accordance with European Directive 2012/19/EU on Waste Electrical
and Electronic Equipment (WEEE), this symbol indicates that the
product must not be disposed of as unsorted municipal waste, but
should be collected separately. Refer to your local Olympus distributor
for return and/or collection systems available in your country.
Important Information — Please Read Before Use
11
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
China RoHS
China RoHS is the term used by industry generally to describe legislation
implemented by the Ministry of Information Industry (MII) in the People’s Republic
of China for the control of pollution by electronic information products (EIP).
The China RoHS mark indicates the product’s EnvironmentFriendly Use Period (EFUP). The EFUP is defined as the number of
years for which listed controlled substances will not leak or
chemically deteriorate while in the product. The EFUP for the
EPOCH 650 has been determined to be 15 years.
Note: The Environment-Friendly Use Period (EFUP) is not meant
to be interpreted as the period assuring functionality and product
performance.
Korea Communications Commission (KCC)
A 급 기기 ( 업무용 방송통신기자재 )
이 기기는 업무용 (A 급 ) 전자파적합기기로서 판 매자 또는 사용자는 이 점을주의하시
기 바라 며 , 가정외의 지역에서 사용하는 것을 목적으로 합니다 .
EMC Directive Compliance
This equipment generates and uses radio-frequency energy and, if not installed and
used properly (that is, in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions), may
cause interference. The EPOCH 650 has been tested and found to comply with the
limits for an industrial device in accordance with the specifications of the EMC
directive.
FCC (USA) Compliance
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1.
12
This device may not cause harmful interference.
Important Information — Please Read Before Use
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
2.
This device must accept any interference received, including interference that
may cause undesired operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A
digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is
operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can
radiate radio frequency energy, and if not installed and used in accordance with the
instruction manual, might cause harmful interference to radio communications.
Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful
interference, in which case you will be required to correct the interference at your own
expense.
ICES-001 (Canada) Compliance
This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-001.
Cet appareil numérique de la classe A est conforme à la norme NMB-001 du Canada.
Warranty Information
Olympus guarantees your Olympus product to be free from defects in materials and
workmanship for a specific period, and in accordance with conditions specified in the
Olympus Scientific Solutions Americas Inc. Terms and Conditions available at
http://www.olympus-ims.com/en/terms/.
The Olympus warranty only covers equipment that has been used in a proper
manner, as described in this instruction manual, and that has not been subjected to
excessive abuse, attempted unauthorized repair, or modification.
Inspect materials thoroughly on receipt for evidence of external or internal damage
that might have occurred during shipment. Immediately notify the carrier making the
delivery of any damage, because the carrier is normally liable for damage during
shipment. Retain packing materials, waybills, and other shipping documentation
needed in order to file a damage claim. After notifying the carrier, contact Olympus
for assistance with the damage claim and equipment replacement, if necessary.
Important Information — Please Read Before Use
13
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
This instruction manual explains the proper operation of your Olympus product. The
information contained herein is intended solely as a teaching aid, and shall not be
used in any particular application without independent testing and/or verification by
the operator or the supervisor. Such independent verification of procedures becomes
increasingly important as the criticality of the application increases. For this reason,
Olympus makes no warranty, expressed or implied, that the techniques, examples, or
procedures described herein are consistent with industry standards, nor that they
meet the requirements of any particular application.
Olympus reserves the right to modify any product without incurring the
responsibility for modifying previously manufactured products.
Technical Support
Olympus is firmly committed to providing the highest level of customer service and
product support. If you experience any difficulties when using our product, or if it
fails to operate as described in the documentation, first consult the user’s manual, and
then, if you are still in need of assistance, contact our After-Sales Service. To locate the
nearest service center, visit the Service Centers page at: http://www.olympusims.com.
14
Important Information — Please Read Before Use
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Introduction
The EPOCH 650 is a portable ultrasonic nondestructive test (NDT) instrument used to
detect flaw conditions in welds, pipes, and many other structural and/or industrial
materials. The instrument may be used in indoor and outdoor environments. This
flaw detector offers advanced conventional ultrasonic performance. The instrument
features a large dynamic range, superior measurement resolution, a full VGA
resolution (640 × 480 pixels) color-liquid crystal display with transflective technology
for superior visibility, and an intuitive user interface.
The EPOCH 650 features many performance, durability, and operational
enhancements when compared to previous EPOCH flaw detectors. These
enhancements include:
•
Case sealed to the requirements of IP66 (adjustment knob configuration) or IP67
(navigation pad configuration) environmental rating
•
Color liquid crystal display (LCD) with full VGA resolution and transflective
technology
•
Compliance with EN12668-1
•
A 100 % digital high dynamic range receiver design
•
30 digital receiver filters
•
Maximum 2000 Hz pulse repetition frequency (PRF)
•
Dynamic DAC/TCG sizing software
•
Onboard DGS/AVG sizing software
•
Optional analog output
•
Digital alarm outputs
•
USB and RS-232 connectivity
•
Adjustment knob or navigational arrow keys
•
2 GB microSD memory card
•
VGA Output Capability
Introduction
15
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Please thoroughly review this document with your EPOCH 650 in hand so that you
can become familiar with the actual use of the instrument.
Olympus recommends that all operators have a thorough understanding of the
principles and limitations of ultrasonic nondestructive testing. Olympus assumes no
responsibility for incorrect operational procedure or interpretation of test results. We
recommend that all operators seek adequate training prior to using this equipment.
While the EPOCH 650 is a continuously self-calibrating instrument, you must
determine regulatory requirements. Olympus offers calibration and documentation
services. Contact Olympus or your local representative with any special requests.
Package Content
The EPOCH 650 comes standard with several key accessories (see Figure i-4 on
page 17):
16
1.
Instrument transport case (P/N: 600-TC [U8780294])
2.
AC charger/adaptor (P/N: EP-MCA-X). Varies by configuration; must select
power cord.
3.
Power cord
4.
2 GB microSD removable memory card and adaptors (P/N: MICROSD-ADP-2GB
[U8779307])
5.
Getting Started Guide (P/N: DMTA-10056-01EN [Q7780001])
6.
EPOCH 650 Ultrasonic Flaw Detector User’s Manual on CD-ROM (P/N: EP650MANUAL-CD [Q7780010])
7.
USB cable (P/N: EPLTC-C-USB-A-6 [U8840031]). (USB cable not shown.)
Introduction
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
4
Lock
3
5
2
6
1
Figure i-4 Transport case contents
For a list of optional accessories, see the parts list on page 331.
Introduction
17
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
18
Introduction
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
1. Hardware Overview
Figure 1-1 on page 19 and Figure 1-2 on page 20 show the EPOCH 650 ultrasonic flaw
detector and identify its main components.
D-rings (4) to attach the
optional chest harness
Protective rubber bumpers (4)
Key pad (navigation pad
configuration shown)
Front panel user interface
Figure 1-1 EPOCH 650 front view
Hardware Overview
19
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
AC power connector
VGA Out connector
BNC transducer
connectors
Digital Out connector
Li-ion battery
compartment cover
Side door
Membrane vent
Pipe stand
Figure 1-2 EPOCH 650 rear view
1.1
Front Panel
The EPOCH 650 front panel features a combination of direct-access keys, navigation
arrows, dynamic function, and parameter access keys to optimize the usability of the
instrument in any mode. The layout of the front panel provides direct access to
common inspection parameters, and easy adjustment of values from either side of the
instrument without obstructing the view of the display.
The EPOCH 650 is available in two front panel configurations to accommodate
different user needs and preferences:
•
Adjustment knob (see Figure 1-3 on page 21)
•
Navigation pad (see Figure 1-4 on page 21).
Both configurations accomplish the same tasks using different physical layouts.
20
Chapter 1
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Alarm indicators
Parameter lock key
Power indicator
Adjustment knob
Display window
Check and
Escape keys
Function keys
Direct access
keys
Power key
Parameter keys
Figure 1-3 The EPOCH 650 — Adjustment knob configuration
Alarm indicators
Power indicator
Arrow keys
Check and
Escape keys
Direct access
keys
Display window
Function keys
Direct access
keys
Power key
Parameter keys
Figure 1-4 The EPOCH 650 — Navigation pad configuration
Hardware Overview
21
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
1.1.1
Adjustment Knob Configuration
The adjustment knob configuration provides smooth value slewing (see Figure 1-6 on
page 23). The adjustment knob is used along with the check key to adjust parameter
values in either coarse or fine increments.
The adjustment knob (
) increases or decreases the value of a highlighted
adjustable parameter.
The Check key (
) toggles a highlighted adjustable parameter between coarse and
fine (see Figure 1-5 on page 22):
•
Coarse adjustment is active when the highlighted parameter is surrounded by
brackets.
•
Fine adjustment is active when there are no brackets.
Figure 1-5 Coarse (left) and fine (right) adjustment selection
The Escape key (
) has three primary functions:
•
When in a setup page,
returns to the live inspection screen.
•
When in a selected menu,
•
When a direct access parameter (gain, range, gates, etc.) is selected,
returns to the basic menu.
returns to
the previous menu.
The direct access keys cause the software interface to jump directly to the associated
parameter or activate a function (see “Direct-Access Keys” on page 28).
22
Chapter 1
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Adjustment knob
Check and Escape keys
Direct access keys
Figure 1-6 The EPOCH 650 — Adjustment knob configuration
Hardware Overview
23
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
In addition to the English, the EPOCH 650 is also offered with an internationalsymbol version of the adjustment knob configuration (see Figure 1-7 on page 24).
Adjustment knob
Check and Escape keys
Direct access keys
NEXT/FULL key
Figure 1-7 Knob configuration (English and international versions)
24
Chapter 1
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
The EPOCH 650 is also offered in Chinese and Japanese versions of the adjustment
knob configuration (see Figure 1-8 on page 25).
Adjustment knob
Check and Escape keys
Direct access keys
NEXT/FULL key
Figure 1-8 Knob configuration (Chinese and Japanese versions)
1.1.2
Navigation Pad Configuration
The navigation pad configuration is similar to previous EPOCH instruments to
provide easy transitions within the EPOCH product line (see Figure 1-9 on page 26).
The Up and Down arrow keys (
) make coarse adjustments to the value of a
highlighted adjustable parameter. The Left and Right arrow keys (
) make
fine adjustments.
Hardware Overview
25
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
The Check key (
the NEXT key).
) is used to scroll through the menus in numerical order (same as
The Escape key (
) has three primary functions:
•
When in a setup page,
returns to the live inspection screen.
•
When in a selected menu,
•
When a direct access parameter (gain, range, gates, etc.) is selected,
returns to the Basic menu item.
returns to
the previous menu.
The direct access keys cause the software interface to jump directly to the associated
parameter or activate a function (see “Direct-Access Keys” on page 28).
Arrow keys
Check and Escape keys
Direct access keys
Direct access keys
Figure 1-9 The EPOCH 650 — Navigation pad configuration
26
Chapter 1
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
The EPOCH 650 is also offered with an international-symbol version of the navigation
pad configuration (see Figure 1-10 on page 27).
Arrow keys
Check and Escape keys
Direct access keys
Direct access keys
NEXT/FULL key
Figure 1-10 Pad configuration (English and international versions)
Hardware Overview
27
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
The EPOCH 650 is also offered with Chinese and Japanese versions of the navigation
pad configuration (see Figure 1-11 on page 28).
Arrow keys
Check and Escape keys
Direct access keys
Direct access keys
NEXT/FULL key
Figure 1-11 Pad configuration (Chinese and Japanese versions)
1.1.3
Direct-Access Keys
Table 3 on page 29 presents a description of each of the key for the English version of
the keypad.
28
Chapter 1
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Table 3 English direct-access key descriptions
Navpad
config.
Knob
config.
Function
dB
Adjusts system sensitivity.
2ND F, (REF dB)
Locks the reference gain level and allows the scanning gain
to be used.
SAVE
Saves to the selected File and ID (navigation pad
configuration only).
2ND F, (SAVE)
Saves to the selected File and ID (knob configuration only).
FREEZE
Freezes holds the displayed waveform until FREEZE is
pressed again.
GATES
Selects gates (1, 2, or IF) on the screen.
2ND F, (AUTO XX%)
Automatically adjusts gated signal to XX% of full-screen
height (see “Using the AUTO XX% Feature” on page 105).
RANGE
Adjusts the instrument’s range according to the sound level
setting.
2ND F, (DELAY)
Displays the delay that does not affect the calibrated zero
offset.
PEAK MEM
Activates the peak memory function (see “Peak Memory”
on page 116).
2ND F, (PEAK HOLD)
Activates the peak hold function (see “Peak Hold” on
page 118).
Hardware Overview
29
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Table 3 English direct-access key descriptions (continued)
Navpad
config.
Knob
config.
Function
2ND F
Accesses the second function identified above the keypad
keys when pressed and released.
1.1.4
Function and Parameter Keys
The function and parameter keys are identical in both appearance and function on
both configurations of the EPOCH 650. Five function keys (F1 through F5) and seven
parameter keys (P1 through P7) are located around the display (see Figure 1-12 on
page 31). On the display, menu system software buttons appear vertically on the right
side and horizontally at the bottom (see Figure 1-13 on page 32). The function and
parameter keys allow you to individually activate a menu system software button.
30
Chapter 1
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Parameter lock key
Function
keys
Parameter keys
Figure 1-12 Function and parameter keys
Hardware Overview
31
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Menu system software
buttons
Menu system software buttons
Figure 1-13 Menu system software buttons
1.1.5
Power Indicator
See Table 4 on page 47 for details on the meaning of the various states of the power
indicator.
Figure 1-14 AC charger/adaptor power indicator
1.1.6
Alarm Indicators
The EPOCH 650 ultrasonic flaw detector provides three alarm indicator lights (see
Figure 1-15 on page 33). The indicators are located on the front panel above the
display window (see Figure 1-3 on page 21 and Figure 1-4 on page 21).
32
Chapter 1
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Interface gate alarm indicator
Gate 2 alarm indicator
Gate 1 alarm indicator
Figure 1-15 Alarm indicators
The alarm indicators illuminate in red when the corresponding gate alarm is
triggered. See “Gate Alarms” on page 133 for information on gate alarms.
1.2
Connectors
The EPOCH 650 is equipped with connectors to allow the necessary and optional
connections.
1.2.1
Transducer Connectors
The EPOCH 650 instrument is supplied with either BNC or LEMO 01 series
transducer connectors. The type of transducer connector is chosen at the time of order.
If necessary, it is possible to change the type of transducer connection at an authorized
Olympus service center for a small charge. Selection of these transducer connections
is based on operator preference. Both the BNC and LEMO 01 series connectors
available are rated to IP67 for use in most inspection environments. The EPOCH 650
is illustrated with BNC connectors in this document.
The transducer connectors are located at the top of the instrument on the left. The two
connectors are easily accessible from the front of the instrument (see Figure 1-16 on
page 34).
Hardware Overview
33
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Analog output connector (optional)
Receive only BNC connector
(LEMO 01 series also available)
Transmit/Receive BNC connector
(LEMO 01 series also available)
Figure 1-16 Location of the transducer connectors
For single-element transducers, either transducer connector may be used. For some
dual transducer and for through-transmission inspections, the transducer connectors
are labeled T/R and R. The T/R connector should be used as the transmit channel, and
R should be used as the receive channel in these situations.
An optional analog output connector is located at the top of the instrument, to the
right of the transducer connectors.
See “Input/Output Specifications” on page 305 for the complete specifications of the
supported I/O signals.
1.2.2
Digital Out Connector
The EPOCH 650 ultrasonic flaw detector comes standard with a Digital Out
connector. This connector provides alarm outputs, serial communication, trigger
synchronization, and encoder inputs. See “Input/Output Specifications” on page 305
for the complete specifications of the supported I/O signals.
The Digital Out connector is located at the back of the EPOCH 650 (see Figure 1-17 on
page 37). A rubber cover protects the connector.
34
Chapter 1
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Ensure the rubber protective cover over the Digital Out connector is firmly closed
before exposing the EPOCH 650 to harsh and wet environments. Always keep the
rubber protective cover firmly closed when no cable is connected.
1.2.2.1
Alarm Output Connector Pins
The EPOCH 650 includes three dedicated alarm outputs that allow you to control an
external device based on an alarm condition. These outputs are combined with the
Digital Out signals on the same connector (see Table 23 on page 305). Each alarm
output is a 5V TTL digital signal that corresponds to the current alarm condition for
each gate. See “Gate Alarms” on page 133 for details on the gate alarm functions.
When a gate alarm is triggered, the corresponding alarm output switches from 0V to
5V TTL.
In addition to three dedicated digital alarm outputs, the EPOCH 650 also includes a
pulse width modulated (PWM) output. This output is enabled by any alarm condition
on the instrument, and is intended to provide an output to control an external horn or
beeper. The N600-EXTALM (U8780332) external alarm box (optional item) is
controlled by this output and amplifies the alarm beep compared to the internal
beeper included with the EPOCH 650.
1.2.2.2
Serial Communication Pins
Serial communication allows remote command of the EPOCH 650. A comprehensive
series of remote commands is available to allow you access to all functions of your
instrument. Contact Olympus for further information.
1.2.2.3
Encoder Input Pins
The EPOCH 650 supports single axis quadrature encoder inputs through the Digital
Out connector. The encoder input pins are exclusively supported by the B-scan
feature embedded in the Corrosion Module software option (see “Corrosion Module”
on page 275). The optional Olympus B-scan encoder BSCAN-ENC (U8779522) can be
connected to the EPOCH 650 using the CBAS-10669-0010 (Q7790008) encoder cable.
Other encoders can be supported using customized cables (see Table 23 on page 305
for the specifications of the supported I/O signals).
Hardware Overview
35
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
1.2.2.4
Trigger Input and Output Pins
The EPOCH 650 trigger synchronization capability allows the instrument to be used
with other devices or instruments. The trigger governs the timing of each instrument
pulse based on the chosen method and, where applicable, external input. Trigger
synchronization is supported as either a trigger input or trigger output on a combined
signal through the Digital Out connector (see Table 23 on page 305).
1.2.3
VGA Out Connector
The VGA Out connector is located at the back of the EPOCH 650 ultrasonic flaw
detector (see Figure 1-17 on page 37). A rubber cover protects the connector.
Using the VGA output, you can display the full contents of the EPOCH 650 screen on
any device that accepts VGA input.
To connect the VGA output to a VGA device
1.
Connect one end of the 600-C-VGA-5 (U8780298) cable (optional item) to the
EPOCH 650 VGA out connector.
2.
Connect the other end of the cable to the VGA device.
Ensure the rubber protective cover over the VGA Out connector is firmly closed
before exposing the EPOCH 650 to harsh and wet environments. Always keep the
rubber protective cover firmly closed when no VGA cable is connected.
36
Chapter 1
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
VGA Out
connector
Digital Out
connector
Figure 1-17 The RS-232/Alarms and VGA Out connectors
1.2.4
USB Client Port and microSD Card Slot
The microSD card slot and USB port are located on the right side of the EPOCH 650
ultrasonic flaw detector. A protective cover has an integral membrane seal to keep out
liquids (see Figure 1-18 on page 38). Two thumb screws on the protective cover allow
quick access to the microSD slot and USB port without the need for tools.
Hardware Overview
37
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Thumb screws (2)
microSD card slot
USB client port
Figure 1-18 The connectors behind the protective cover
1.2.4.1
USB Client Port
The EPOCH 650 ultrasonic flaw detector comes standard with one USB port currently
used for PC client communication. The USB client port allows one-way
communication only. A peripheral device can pass commands to the EPOCH 650, but
the EPOCH 650 cannot pass commands to a peripheral device.
To connect any device (including a personal computer) to the EPOCH 650, an
appropriate USB cable is required.
Do not expose the instrument to harsh and wet environments while the computer
connection protective cover is opened. To prevent connector corrosion and damage to
the instrument, keep the computer connection protective cover closed and sealed
when no cable is connected.
38
Chapter 1
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
1.2.4.2
microSD Card Slot
A 2 GB microSD card is included with every EPOCH 650, but most types and
capacities of microSD cards can be used.
To install the microSD memory card
1.
Remove the card from its packaging.
2.
Loosen the two thumb screws, and then open the computer connection protective
cover (see Figure 1-19 on page 39).
3.
Hold the microSD card so that the metal pins face toward the front of the
instrument.
4.
Carefully slide the card into the microSD slot until it clicks.
To remove the microSD card
 Carefully push the card into the instrument and release.
A spring mechanism partially ejects the card so you can grasp and remove it from
the instrument.
microSD card slot
microSD card
Side door
Figure 1-19 Installing the microSD card
Hardware Overview
39
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
1.3
Battery Compartment
Two thumb screws on the battery compartment cover allow quick access to the
lithium-ion battery pack without the need for tools (see Figure 1-20 on page 40).
The battery compartment cover also has a small hole in the bottom center area that is
covered on the inside by an environmentally sealed membrane vent.
IMPORTANT
The membrane vent is a safety feature that is required in the event that the instrument
battery fails and emits gas. This vent must not be punctured.
Thumb screw (2)
Battery compartment
cover
Membrane vent
hole
Figure 1-20 The battery compartment
The EPOCH 650 ultrasonic flaw detector accepts one rechargeable lithium-ion battery
pack (P/N: 600-BAT-L-3 [U8051431]) that can be recharged inside the instrument or on
the optional external charging base (P/N: EPXT-EC-X).
40
Chapter 1
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
1.4
Instrument Stand
The EPOCH 650 ultrasonic flaw detector features an articulating pipe stand for
variable viewing angles (see Figure 1-21 on page 41). The stand is attached to the back
of the instrument with two hard pivot blocks, and has a high friction coating for
resistance to sliding during use. The stand is shaped to easily accommodate
placement on a curved surface.
Figure 1-21 Instrument resting on stand
Hardware Overview
41
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
42
Chapter 1
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
2. Powering the EPOCH 650
The EPOCH 650 ultrasonic flaw detector is designed to operate using either of two
power supply sources:
•
Internal lithium-ion battery
•
Directly from the EPOCH charger/adaptor
Whatever source is selected, the power on/off procedure is the same.
To power on or off the EPOCH 650
1.
Press the Power button to turn on the EPOCH 650 (see Figure 2-1 on page 43).
Pressing this key once causes an initial beep, followed by the instrument startup
screen. Approximately 5 seconds later, a second beep indicates that the system is
ready for use.
Power LED
Power button
Figure 2-1 Location of the EPOCH 650 power key and indicator
Powering the EPOCH 650
43
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
2.
Press the Power button to turn off the EPOCH 650.
The system beeps, then immediately shuts down.
2.1
Lithium-Ion Battery
The lithium-ion (Li-ion) battery is the primary method for powering the EPOCH 650.
This battery comes installed in every instrument. When properly maintained, and
when the instrument is operated under typical inspection conditions, the lithium-ion
battery should provide between 15 and 16 hours of continuous operation. For
instructions on replacing the battery, see “Replacing the Battery” on page 297.
TIP
Make a habit of ensuring the battery is fully charged before taking the instrument out
into the field (see Table 4 on page 47 for information on reading the charging status).
The battery may require several complete charge/discharge cycles to reach full
capacity. This conditioning process is normal for these types of rechargeable
batteries.
Maximizing Battery Performance
By nature, unused batteries slowly discharge. A fully discharged battery does not
recharge. Follow the instructions below to maximize the battery performance:
44
•
When the battery is used daily, connect it to the AC charger/adaptor when not in
use.
•
Whenever possible, the battery should remain connected to the AC
charger/adaptor (overnight or over a weekend), so that it achieves 100 % full
charge.
•
The battery must reach full charge on a regular basis for proper capacity and
cycle-life maintenance.
•
Recharge discharged batteries as soon as possible after use.
Chapter 2
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
•
Store batteries in a cool, dry environment.
•
Avoid long-term storage under sunlight or in other excessively hot places such as
an automobile trunk.
•
While in storage, fully recharge batteries at least once every two months.
•
Never place partially discharged batteries in storage without a full recharge.
2.2
AC Charger/Adaptor
The EPOCH 650 AC charger/adaptor is provided with every instrument. The
charger/adaptor allows you to power the EPOCH 650. When a lithium-ion
rechargeable battery is installed in the instrument and the charger/adaptor is
connected, the battery charges.
The EPOCH 650 charger/adaptor is designed to charge EPOCH 650 batteries only
(P/N: 600-BAT-L-3 [U8051431]). Do not attempt to charge any other batteries or use
any other chargers/adaptors. Doing so can cause an explosion or injury.
To connect the AC charger/adaptor
1.
Connect the power cord to the charger/adaptor unit and to an appropriate power
outlet (see Figure 2-2 on page 46).
Use only the AC power cord supplied with the EPOCH 650. Do not use the supplied
AC power cord with other products.
Powering the EPOCH 650
45
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
DC power plug
AC charger/adaptor
AC (mains) power plug
AC power cord
Figure 2-2 Connecting the charger/adaptor
2.
Lift the rubber seal that covers the AC charger/adaptor connector on top of the
EPOCH 650 instrument.
3.
Connect the DC power plug to the DC adaptor connector (see Figure 2-3 on
page 46).
DC power plug
DC adaptor connector (rubber
seal not shown)
Figure 2-3 Connecting the DC power plug
46
Chapter 2
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
2.3
Standalone Battery Charger
The EPOCH 650 ultrasonic flaw detector battery can also be charged externally using
the optional standalone battery charger (P/N: EPXT-EC-X). Charging a battery
externally allows you to charge one battery while using another in the instrument. For
more information about the external charger, contact Olympus or your local sales
representative.
2.4
Power Status Indicators
The power status of the AC charger/adaptor and the battery charge status are
indicated by both the front panel AC charger/adaptor power indicator (see Figure 2-4
on page 47), and the user interface Battery/AC indicator (see Table 4 on page 47).
Figure 2-4 Front panel AC charger/adaptor power indicator
The status states of the Battery/AC indicator are shown in Table 4 on page 47. The
Battery/AC indicator is accurate after 5 to 10 minutes of use.
Table 4 EPOCH 650 power status indicators
AC charger/adaptor
power indicator
AC power
connected?
Status
Green
Yes
Li-ion battery either fully charged, or
Battery/AC
indicator
not installed
Red
Yes
Li-ion battery installed and charging
Powering the EPOCH 650
47
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Table 4 EPOCH 650 power status indicators(continued)
AC charger/adaptor
power indicator
AC power
connected?
Green
No
Status
Li-ion battery level as indicated by
the black horizontal bar
48
Chapter 2
Battery/AC
indicator
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
3. Software Overview
The EPOCH 650 software main display is shown in Figure 3-1 on page 49.
File name
File ID number
Measurement
readings
(up to 5)
Basic parameters
Live A-scan view
Menu buttons
Gate 2 (blue)
Gate 1 (red)
Group menu
identification
number
Parameter buttons
Figure 3-1 Software main display elements
There are five groups of menus on the EPOCH 650. Each menu group is identified
with a number (1/5, 2/5, 3/5, 4/5, and 5/5). The menu indicator, located in the lowerright corner of the software main display, shows which menu is currently selected (see
Figure 3-1 on page 49). For example, the menu indicator showing 1/5, means that
there are five standard available menus and that the first one is currently selected. To
scroll through all menu groups, use the NEXT key (see Figure 3-2 on page 50).
Software Overview
49
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
NEXT key
1/5
2/5
3/5
4/5
5/5
Figure 3-2 The menu groups and their level numbers
3.1
Choosing a Function Menu Item
The function menu item with a green background is the function that is selected. At
startup, the first function menu item in each of the five menu groups is the default
selection (see Figure 3-2 on page 50). Only one function menu item at a time can be
selected.
To choose a function menu item
 Press the corresponding function key.
For example, if you want to choose the Basic function in menu group one, press
the F1 key (see Figure 3-3 on page 50).
Figure 3-3 F1 key selecting the Basic function
50
Chapter 3
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
3.2
Parameter Selection
When a parameter button has a green background it is selected, and the
corresponding function button remains green (see Figure 3-4 on page 51).
Currently selected
function
Currently selected parameter
Figure 3-4 The focus is on the selected parameter (green)
To select a parameter
 Press the corresponding parameter key.
For example, if you want to choose the Range parameter, press the P3 key (see
Figure 3-5 on page 52).
Software Overview
51
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Figure 3-5 P3 key selecting the Range parameter
3.3
Convention for Identifying Menu Items and Parameters
The following convention is used to concisely refer to an element in the menu
structure:
Menu > Parameter = value
where:
Menu represents the name of the menu item (example: Meas Setup)
Parameter represents the name of the parameter (example: Unit)
Value represents the desired editable or selectable parameter value (example:
mm)
For example, to instruct you to set the Unit parameter to mm, in the Meas Setup
menu, the expression: Meas Setup > Unit = mm is used.
Choose Meas Setup > Unit = mm
If the value cannot be edited, the expression does not include a value:
Choose Gate1 >Zoom
3.4
Parameter Adjustment
When a parameter such as gain or range is selected, you can modify it using the arrow
keys or adjustment knob (depending on your hardware configuration).
52
Chapter 3
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
•
The Up and Down arrow keys (
) make coarse adjustments to the value of a
highlighted adjustable parameter. The Left and Right arrow keys (
) make
fine adjustments.
•
The adjustment knob turns clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease
a parameter value. The Check key (
adjustments.
) toggles between coarse and fine
For both the navigation pad and adjustment knob configurations, you can customize
preset values for coarse adjustment (see “Editable Parameters Page” on page 102)
3.5
Escape Key
The Escape key (
) has three primary functions:
•
When in a setup page,
returns to the live inspection screen.
•
When in a selected menu,
•
When a direct access parameter (gain, range, gates, etc.) is selected,
returns to the Basic menu item.
returns to
the previous menu.
3.6
Lock Key
The Lock key (knob configuration only) automatically locks adjustment of all
parameters to prevent any unwanted parameter modifications because of accidental
knob movement (see Figure 3-6 on page 54).
Software Overview
53
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Lock key
Figure 3-6 Adjustment knob configuration — Lock key
3.7
AUTO XX% Feature
Pressing 2ND F, (AUTO XX%) activates the AUTO XX% feature, which automatically
adjusts the gain in order to set the gated echo amplitude to XX% of full screen height
(the default XX value is 80 %). (See Figure 3-7 on page 54.)
Figure 3-7 The AUTO XX% feature: inactive (left) and active (right)
3.8
Submenus
When selecting certain items, such as Display Setup, the NEXT key scrolls through
rows within the submenu, the adjustment knob or navigation pad arrows adjust the
chosen value, and the Escape key (
54
Chapter 3
) returns to the live A-scan view.
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
3.9
Pulser and Receiver Settings
The EPOCH 650 allows access to most of its pulser and receiver settings through the
Pulser and the Rcvr menus. System sensitivity (gain) and reference gain are
controlled exclusively using the direct-access keys.
3.9.1
Sensitivity
The system sensitivity (gain) is adjusted using the dB direct-access key.
To adjust the system sensitivity
1.
Press dB.
2.
Adjust the value:
Use the navigation pad arrow keys or rotate the adjustment knob in either
coarse or fine increments
OR
Press one of the parameter keys to choose the corresponding preset value
You can automatically adjust gain using the AUTO XX% feature. See “Escape Key” on
page 53.
3.9.2
Reference Gain
You can define a reference gain by pressing 2ND F, (REF dB). This sets the current gain
as the reference gain and activates a scanning gain for further adjustments (see
Figure 3-8 on page 56).
When the reference gain is set, the parameter keys allow access to the following
functions:
•
Add: Combines current scanning gain with current reference gain and sets the
resultant as the new reference gain.
•
Scan dB: Toggles between current scanning gain and 0.0 dB scanning gain.
•
Off: Turns off reference gain feature (scanning gain is lost).
•
+6 dB: Increases the scanning gain by 6 dB.
•
−6 dB: Decreases the scanning gain by 6 dB.
Software Overview
55
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Reference gain
Scanning gain
Figure 3-8 The reference and scanning gains
3.9.3
Pulser
The EPOCH 650 main pulser functions are accessible by choosing the Pulser menu.
Each individual pulser parameter is displayed above the parameter keys, and can be
adjusted by pressing the corresponding parameter key.
The following pulser functions are available for live adjustment in the Pulser menu:
•
PRF Mode: Selects either Auto or Manual PRF (Pulse Repetition Frequency)
adjustment mode. Auto changes the PRF setting based on the screen range, and
Manual allows manual adjustment of PRF in 10 Hz increments.
•
PRF: Pulse Repetition Frequency values range: from 10 Hz to 2000 Hz in 10 Hz
increments
•
Energy: Pulse voltage values available: 0 V, 100 V, 200 V, 300 V, or 400 V
•
Damp: Pulse damping values available: 50 Ω, 100 Ω, 200 Ω, or 400 Ω
•
Mode: pulse modes available: P/E (pulse-echo), Dual, and Thru (throughtransmission)
•
Pulser: Pulser waveforms available: Spike or Square (tunable square wave)
•
Freq: Pulse frequency (square wave pulse width) ranges from 0.1 MHz to
20.00 MHz
The Spike pulse is equivalent to a 20 MHz square wave pulse.
3.9.4
Receiver
The EPOCH 650 standard receiver functions are accessible by choosing the Rcvr
menu. Each individual receiver parameter is displayed above the parameter keys, and
can be adjusted by pressing the corresponding parameter key.
56
Chapter 3
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
The following receiver parameters are available for live adjustments in the Rcvr
menu:
•
Filter: Receiver filter setting
•
Rect: Waveform rectification (Full full wave, Half+ half wave positive, Half– half
wave negative, RF no rectification)
•
Reject: Percent reject (from 0 % to 80 %)
The 30 filters available on the EPOCH 650 allow broadband or narrowband settings to
match the requirements of a given application. Each filter is a fully digital filter set.
Table 5 on page 57 lists the low-pass and high-pass cutoffs for each available filter.
Table 5 Filter cutoffs
0.2 MHz−10 MHz
2.0 MHz−21.5 MHz
8.0 MHz−26.5 MHz
0.5 MHz−4.0 MHz
0.2 MHz−1.2 MHz
1.5 MHz−8.5 MHz
5.0 MHz−15 MHz
DC−10 MHz
DC−1.2 MHz
DC−4.0 MHz
DC−8.5 MHz
DC−15.0 MHz
DC−26.5 MHz
0.2 MHz−4.0 MHz
0.2 MHz−8.5 MHz
0.2 MHz−15.0 MHz
0.2 MHz−26.5 MHz
0.5 MHz−10.0 MHz
0.5 MHz−8.5 MHz
0.5 MHz−26.5 MHz
0.5 MHz−15.0 MHz
1.0 MHz−3.5 MHz
1.5 MHz−10.0 MHz
1.5 MHz−15.0 MHz
1.5 MHz−26.5 MHz
2.5 MHz−7.0 MHz
5.0 MHz−10.0 MHz
5.0 MHz−26.5 MHz
6.0 MHz−12.0 MHz
8.0 MHz−15.0 MHz
Software Overview
57
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
3.10 Gates
The EPOCH 650 features two standard independent measurement gates and one
optional independent measurement gate. Gate 1 and gate 2 are the standard
measurement gates. The Interface Gate is an optional measurement gate principally
used in immersion applications (see “Interface Gate” on page 271).
Gate 1 is displayed as a red, solid horizontal bar. Gate 2 is displayed as a blue, hollow
horizontal bar. The Interface Gate is displayed as a yellow, hollow horizontal bar.
These gates independently define digital measurements regions for amplitude, timeof-flight measurements, and other specialized readings. Each gate also features alarm
and zoom functions.
3.10.1
Quickly Adjusting Basic Gate Parameters
The GATES direct-access key allows instant access to gate start, width, and level
adjustments without requiring the user to enter any gate-related menus. This is the
most common method for gate adjustments.
When GATES is pressed, the box above the first menu displays the gate 1 start
position (see Figure 3-9 on page 58). Once a gate is selected, the knob or arrows can
increase or decrease this value, in coarse or fine increments.
Gate 1 start position adjustment
Figure 3-9 The Gate 1 start position adjustment
Pressing GATES repeatedly scrolls through the start, width, and level setting of every
active gate. Pressing
or NEXT returns focus to the menu group used before gate
adjustment, allowing efficient adjustment of the gates with minimal interference for
the operator.
For more comprehensive gate setup and adjustment, there are three menus that
manage gate settings: Gate1, Gate2, and Gate Setup.
58
Chapter 3
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
3.10.2
Gate 1 and Gate 2
Both Gate 1 and Gate 2 menus allow access to specific gate positioning and alarm
functions. When either menu is selected, the following parameters become visible
above the parameter keys.
•
Zoom: Sets the display range to begin at the start position of the selected gate, and
to stop at the end position of the selected gate (gate start + gate width).
Pressing the Zoom parameter key repeatedly toggles the zoom on and off.
•
Start: Adjusts the start position of the selected gate.
•
Width: Adjusts the width of the selected gate.
•
Level: Adjusts the screen height of the selected gate (from 3 % to 95 %).
•
Alarm: Sets the alarm condition of the selected gate (Off, Positive, Negative, Min
Depth)
•
Min Depth: Visible only when the Alarm parameter is set to Min Depth. Adjusts
the threshold in time-of-flight units that triggers a Min Depth alarm condition.
•
AFreeze: Visible only when Alarm is Positive or Negative. Activates or
deactivates the Auto Freeze function (for more information, see “Freeze” on
page 118).
•
Status: Turns the gate on or off (effects measurements, alarms, and visibility of
gate on screen).
3.10.3
Gate Setup
The Gate Setup menu allows more advanced settings for each gate to be adjusted
prior to inspection. These settings are visible above the parameter keys. The following
gate settings are available in the Gate Setup menu:
•
G1 Mode: Sets the measurement trigger mode of gate 1 (Peak, 1stPeak, Edge, JFlank)
•
G1 RF: Sets the polarity of the gate 1 when the instrument is operating in RF
rectification (Dual, Positive, Negative)
•
G1 %Amp: Used only in Edge mode. Sets the measurement trigger for the percent
amplitude digital measurement of gate 1 when in Edge detection mode (High
Peak, 1stPeak).
Software Overview
59
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
•
G2 Mode/G2 RF/G2 %Amp: Same settings as above, but for gate 2 only.
•
G2 Tracks: Toggles tracking mode of gate 2 with respect to gate 1 on or off.
Tracking ON is considered true echo-to-echo measurement mode.
Gate measurement modes, selected by G1 Mode or G2 Mode, determine which gated
echo or echo parameters triggers a digital measurement.
•
Edge: Acquires measurement readings based on the position of the first crossing
point of a gated signal (see Figure 3-10 on page 60).
•
Peak: Acquires measurement readings based on the highest peak within the gated
region (does not have to cross the gate threshold). See Figure 3-10 on page 60.
•
1stPeak: Acquires measurement readings based on the first peak to cross the gate
threshold (level). See Figure 3-11 on page 61.
•
J-Flank: Acquires thickness measurement readings based on the position of the
first crossing point of a gated signal and amplitude measurement readings from
the highest peak of the first echo in the gated region (see Figure 3-11 on page 61).
Edge
Peak
Figure 3-10 Trigger in Edge and Peak modes
60
Chapter 3
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
1st Peak
J-Flank
Figure 3-11 Trigger in 1stPeak, and J-Flank modes
3.10.4
Gate Alarm Indications
Whenever an alarm is triggered on either measurement gate, you are alerted in two
different ways:
•
The EPOCH 650 emits an audible tone
•
One of two alarm indicators (LEDs) is illuminated on the instrument front panel
(see Figure 3-12 on page 61).
Gate 2 alarm indicator
Gate 1 alarm indicator
Figure 3-12 Gate 1 and gate 2 alarm indicator lights
Software Overview
61
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
The EPOCH 650 is also capable of outputting alarm signals through the Digital Out
connector on the back panel of the instrument (see “Alarm Outputs” on page 137).
3.11
Calibration
The EPOCH 650 can be easily calibrated for both zero offset and velocity in order to
provide accurate thickness (sound path) measurements from indications. The
EPOCH 650 utilizes an auto-calibration system for a simple, two-point approach. See
“Calibration” on page 143 for more detailed calibration information.
3.11.1
Measurement calibration
Calibration for accurate digital measurements is typically accomplished using two
known thicknesses of a representative material. In this section, the terms thin and
thick are used to refer to either two thicknesses of a block or plate (straight beam
calibrations) or two lengths of an angled sound path (angle beam calibration).
To begin calibration
62
1.
Couple the transducer to the thin step of the material.
2.
Position gate 1 around the resulting indication on screen.
3.
Press 2ND F (AUTO XX%) to bring the indication to 80 % of full screen height.
4.
Choose the Auto Cal menu item (see Figure 3-13 on page 63).
Chapter 3
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Figure 3-13 The Auto Cal menu
5.
Select the Type parameter, then select the appropriate calibration type (Thickness
for straight beam or Soundpath for angle beam are the most common).
6.
Select Cal-Zero.
7.
Adjust the displayed value to the appropriate thickness. For this example, the
transducer is coupled to a 5 mm (0.200 in.) step (see Figure 3-14 on page 64).
Software Overview
63
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Figure 3-14 The Cal-Zero value
8.
Select Continue to accept the adjusted value, and then move on to the second
calibration step.
9.
Couple the transducer to the thick step of material.
10. Position gate 1 around the resulting indication on screen.
11. Bring the indication to 80 % full screen height using the 2ND F, (AUTO XX%) keys
(see Figure 3-15 on page 65).
64
Chapter 3
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Figure 3-15 The gate 1 start
12. Select Cal-Vel.
13. Use the knob or arrow keys to adjust the displayed value to the appropriate
thickness. For this example, the transducer is coupled to a 12.5 mm (0.500 in.) step
(see Figure 3-16 on page 66).
Software Overview
65
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Figure 3-16 The Velocity Cal value
14. Select Done to accept the adjusted value and complete the calibration process.
15. Press RANGE, and then adjust the screen range to the desired setting (see
Figure 3-17 on page 66).
Figure 3-17 The Range value
66
Chapter 3
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
3.11.2
Angle Beam Calibration
Angle beam calibrations typically require four steps.
To perform an angle beam calibration
1.
Locate the Beam Index Point (see “Locating the Beam Index Point” on page 165).
2.
Verify the refracted angle of wedge (see “Verifying the Refracted Angle” on
page 167).
3.
Complete the distance calibration using “Measurement calibration” on page 62
(Calibration mode set to SoundPath or Depth depending on the reflector type).
4.
Set the sensitivity using “Calibrating for Sensitivity” on page 173 (See Figure 3-18
on page 67).
— Capture the sensitivity hole or notch in gate 1, bringing the indication to 80 %
screen height using 2ND F, (AUTO XX%).
— Set the reference gain by pressing 2ND F, (REF dB).
Figure 3-18 Reference gain setting
Software Overview
67
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
3.12 Data Logger
The EPOCH 650 features an onboard data logging system that allows standard
storage of inspection files (Inc) and dedicated calibration files (Cal), as well as
inspection files in corrosion style configurations (2D, 3D, Boiler, etc). Regardless of file
type, each discrete data point saved on the EPOCH 650 stores all active digital
measurements, compressed A-scans, calibration data, alarm conditions, and active
software features. Two gigabytes of onboard memory allows storage of over 100,000
individual data points.
The section below outlines the procedure for setup and storage of the most basic and
common file type, the calibration file. For full details and procedures on standard and
optional file types, see “Data Logger” on page 187.
3.12.1
Calibration Files
To setup and save a calibration file on the EPOCH 650, first complete all ultrasonic
and software setups that will be saved within the calibration.
To create and store a calibration file
68
1.
Select the File menu item.
2.
Select the Create parameter (see Figure 3-19 on page 69).
3.
In the File Type box, use the knob or arrow keys to select Cal.
4.
Press NEXT to advance to the Filename box.
5.
Select the Edit parameter to display the virtual keypad (see Figure 3-19 on
page 69).
6.
Use the knob or arrows to navigate through the virtual keypad and create a file
name (32 characters maximum).
7.
Insert a character by selecting INS (the F5 key).
Chapter 3
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Figure 3-19 The Create screen with virtual keypad
8.
Press NEXT to complete the file naming process.
For creation of an incremental (Inc) file, you must first create a Start Point.
9.
Press NEXT until the Create button is highlighted.
10. Select the &Save parameter.
The &Save parameter creates the file in memory, opens it as the active storage
location, then prompts you to save the current file parameters to the file (see
Figure 3-20 on page 70).
Software Overview
69
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Figure 3-20 The Save dialog box
Two other file creation parameters are available and described below:
•
Create: Creates the file in memory but does not open this file as the active
storage location. Typically used when creating several files at once without
saving data.
•
&Open: Creates the file in memory, and then opens it as the active storage
location, but does not save any file parameters to the file until you press
2ND F, (SAVE). This is typically used for inspection files, where the file is
created before the start of the inspection.
11. Press YES (P1 key) to accept the function and return to the live screen.
3.12.2
Resetting the Instrument
The EPOCH 650 allows you to reset its current settings to default values. This
capability is useful if you want to reset the instrument parameters, delete all the data
logger files, or reset the instrument back to its factory settings.
To reset the EPOCH 650
1.
70
Choose Manage > Reset to display the Resets page (see Figure 3-21 on page 71).
Chapter 3
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
2.
Use the arrow keys or the adjustment knob to highlight a reset type and press
Select (P1 key).
Available reset types are:
•
Parameters reset
Resets only the current on-screen parameters to system default values (does
not affect saved files).
•
Storage Reset
Deletes all saved files with no effect on live instrument settings. (Only the
default NONAME00 file will remain.)
•
Master Reset
Resets all live settings to factory defaults and deletes all saved files.
•
Power Down
Used to turn off the instrument.
Figure 3-21 The Resets page
Software Overview
71
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
72
Chapter 3
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
4. Software Interface
The EPOCH 650 software main display is shown in Figure 4-1 on page 73.
File name
File ID number
Measurement
reading boxes
Basic parameters
Flag
Live A-scan view
Menu buttons
Gate 2 (blue)
Gate 1 (red)
Group menu
identification
number
Parameter buttons
Figure 4-1 Software main display elements
For information on selecting functions and parameters, see “Software Overview” on
page 49 through “Submenus” on page 54
The main display in full screen mode is shown in Figure 4-2 on page 74.
Software Interface
73
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
To change the size of the main display
Press 2ND F (FULL), to set the main display to full screen mode.
Press the Escape key
, to revert from the full screen to normal screen size.
Measurement reading boxes
Gain setting
Figure 4-2 Software display elements in full screen mode
4.1
Button Types
Table 6 on page 74 shows the various types of buttons found in the EPOCH 650
ultrasonic flaw detector interface.
Table 6 Button types
Type
Function
74
Chapter 4
Example
Description
Function menu item that immediately executes a
command when selected.
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Table 6 Button types (continued)
Type
4.2
Example
Description
Submenu
Function menu item that opens a dialog box or a screen
with more parameters.
Editable value
Parameter with an editable value.
Turn the adjustment knob or press the arrow keys to
change the value.
Selectable
value
Parameter with a set of predetermined selectable
values.
Turn the adjustment knob or press the arrow keys to
select the value.
File Identifier and Message Bars
The file identifier bar appears at the top of the main display and shows the name of
the currently opened file, and the identifier (see example in Figure 4-3 on page 75).
File name
File ID number
Figure 4-3 File identifier bar with ID example
The message bar appears at the bottom of the screen displaying messages and
notifications as needed, following your actions (see example in Figure 4-4 on page 75).
Figure 4-4 Message bar with a message example
Software Interface
75
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
4.3
Direct-Access Parameters
Direct-access parameters always appear at the top right corner of the display window.
This allows you to view these parameters from the main screen regardless of which
menu or parameter you are currently accessing. These parameters include Gain,
Range, Delay, and Gates.
To select and view the direct-access parameters
•
Press the dB direct-access key to select the Gain parameter.
•
Press the RANGE direct-access key to select the Range parameter.
•
Press the GATES direct-access key to select the Gate parameters. The G1Start
parameter replaces the Delay parameter.
•
Press the 2ND F (DELAY) direct-access key to select the Delay parameter.
Once selected, the button turns green (see Figure 4-5 on page 76). Turn the adjustment
knob or press the Up and Down arrow keys to edit the value. For additional
information on gate adjustment, see “Quickly Adjusting Basic Gate Parameters” on
page 125.
Press dB to select
Press RANGE to select
Press 2ND F, (DELAY) to select. Press
GATES to return to gate parameter
Figure 4-5 Example of the Gain, Range, and Delay direct-access parameters
When you are using the gain, range, or delay direct access keys, a set of preset values
display over the parameter keys at the bottom of the screen (see Figure 4-6 on
page 77). These preset values allow you to jump to a particular setting with a single
button press, and can be customized (see “Editable Parameters Page” on page 102).
76
Chapter 4
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
RANGE direct access
key is active
RANGE preset values
displayed over
parameter keys
Figure 4-6 Direct access preset values
4.4
Measurement Reading Boxes
The measurement reading boxes at the top-left corner of the software main display
present the icons and digital values for up to five selectable measurements (see
Figure 4-7 on page 77). See “Reading Setup Page” on page 91 for details on how to
select measurements and for a description of available measurements.
Reading 1
Reading 3
Reading 5
Reading 2
Reading 4
Figure 4-7 Example of measurement reading boxes with their icons
Software Interface
77
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
4.5
Live-Scan Area
The large fixed-size live-scan area displays the ultrasonic data graphically (see
Figure 4-8 on page 78).
Gate 2
Gate 1
Figure 4-8 Example of an A-scan waveform with gates
4.6
Flags
The EPOCH 650 ultrasonic flaw detector indicates when particular functions are
active by displaying a set of flags, in a thin vertical area on the right of the live-scan
area (see Figure 4-9 on page 79). Table 7 on page 79 provides a description of the
possible flags.
78
Chapter 4
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Flag area
Figure 4-9 The area displaying flags
Table 7 Flag description
Flag
Description
Length units are inches
Length units are millimeters
Length units are microseconds
Indicates that the 2ND F key has been pressed.
Gate 1 is in peak measurement mode.
Gate 2 is in peak measurement mode.
Software Interface
79
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Table 7 Flag description (continued)
Flag
Description
Gate 1 is in edge (or flank) measurement mode.
Gate 2 is in edge (or flank) measurement mode.
Gate 1 is in first-peak measurement mode.
Gate 2 is in first-peak measurement mode.
The IF gate is in J-Flank measurement mode.
Gate 1 is in J-Flank measurement mode.
Gate 2 is in J-Flank measurement mode.
DAC is active.
DGS is active.
AWS is active.
API 5UE is active.
Template Storage is active.
80
Chapter 4
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Table 7 Flag description (continued)
Flag
Description
Calibration is active.
Curved surface correction (CSC) is active.
B-scan is active.
Gate tracking (Echo-to-Echo) is active.
Zoom is active.
FREEZE is active.
Auto FREEZE is active.
PEAK MEM is active.
2ND F, (PEAK HOLD) reference echo is active.
Waveform averaging is active.
Access to all instrument functions except ON/OFF is locked.
Indicates that a microSD card is installed.
Indicates that the microSD card is not installed.
Current settings are restricting waveform update rate below
60 Hz.
Software Interface
81
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Table 7 Flag description (continued)
Flag
Description
Indicates that the charger is connected and charging the battery.
Indicates that the instrument is running off of battery power.
Indicates that video record mode is actively acquiring a video.
4.7
Menu Contents
The EPOCH 650 ultrasonic flaw detector uses menus to categorize similar functions. It
includes five menu groups shown in Figure 4-10 on page 83.
82
Chapter 4
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
1/5
2/5
3/5
/5
5/5
Figure 4-10 Standard menu groups
Table 8 on page 83 to Table 12 on page 85 provides a quick reference of available
menus and parameters for each menu group.
Table 8 Content of the first menu group
Menus
Parameters
Basic
Velocity
Zero
Range
Delay
Pulser
PRF Mode
PRF
Energy
Damp
Rcvr
Filter
Rect
Trig
Angle
Thick
X Value
Auto
Cal
Type
Cal-Vel
Cal-Zero
Mode
Pulser
Freq
Reject
CSC
G1Start
Software Interface
83
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Table 9 Content of the second menu group
Menus
Parameters
Gate 1
Zoom
Start
Width
Level
Alarm
Min Depth
(only when
Alarm is
set to Min
Depth)
Status
Gate 2
Zoom
Start
Width
Level
Alarm
Min Depth
(only when
Alarm is
set to Min
Depth)
Status
Gate
Setup
G1 Mode
G1 RF
G2 RF
G2 %Amp G2 Tracks
G1 %Amp G2 Mode
Table 10 Content of the third menu group
Menus
Parameters
Display
Setup
Display
Setup
Grid
Meas
Setup
Reading
Setup
Unit
TH Res
% Res
A-Out
Special
Inst
Setup
General
About
Clock
Software
Options
Misc
Edit
Parameters
AutoXX %
Table 11 Content of the fourth menu group
Menus
DAC/TCG
84
Chapter 4
Parameters
Add (setup
mode)
DAC Gain
(inspect mode)
Delete
(setup
mode)
View
(inspect
mode)
Done
(inspect
mode)
Gain Step
(inspect
mode)
G1Start
Edit
Setup
(inspect
mode)
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Table 11 Content of the fourth menu group (continued)
Menus
DGS/AVG
Parameters
Ref (setup Reg Level
mode)
(inspect
Delta VT
mode)
(inspect mode)
ACV Spec
(inspect
mode)
G1Start
Setup
G1Start
Setup
AWS
Ref B
Scan dB
Ref Level
(inspect
mode)
API5UE
RefAMax
(setup mode)
Collect (setup
mode, Peak
Mem active,
and inspect
mode)
RefT1
(setup
mode)
RefT2
(setup
mode)
Template
Template1 Template2 Template3 Template4 Template5 Template Setup
(inspect mode) (inspect
(inspect
(inspect
(inspect 6 or right
mode)
mode)
mode)
mode)
arrow
(inspect
mode)
G1Start
Inspect
Clear
Setup
(setup
(setup
mode, data mode,
collected)
data
Re-Cal collected
(inspect
)
mode)
Table 12 Content of the fifth menu group
Menus
Parameters
File
Open
Create
Thick
Record
Quick
Recall
Memo
Last ID
Select ID
Manage
Reset
Export
Import
Edit
Copy
Delete
Import
Memo
Video
Record
Record
(setup
mode)
Frames
(setup
mode)
Pause
(record
mode)
Flag
(record
mode)
Save (setup Video Files
mode)
(setup
mode)
Setup
To choose a menu group, a menu, and a parameter value
1.
Press NEXT to select a menu group.
Software Interface
85
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
2.
Select a menu item using the corresponding function key. The menu indicator
identifies the selected menu (see “Menu Contents” on page 82 for details on the
menu structure).
3.
Select the parameter you want using the corresponding parameter key.
To change the value of a parameter
1.
Choose the value by selecting the corresponding parameter.
The button background of the selected parameter turns to green, showing that it
is selected.
2.
Use the arrow keys or turn the adjustment knob to change the value (see
“Parameter Adjustment” on page 52).
The edited value is immediately effective. Note that some parameters have a fixed
value or state.
4.8
Setup Pages
The EPOCH 650 ultrasonic flaw detector software includes a number of setup pages
allowing you to adjust instrument features and parameters to your preferences. The
Display setup page shown in Figure 4-11 on page 87, is an example of a setup page.
86
Chapter 4
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Title bar
Currently selected parameter
Available values for the selected
parameter
Figure 4-11 The Display setup page and its elements
A title bar identifies the type of setup page. Parameters appear with the parameter
label on the left and its current value and units (if applicable) on the right. Seven
button fields at the bottom of the page may contain available values for the currently
selected parameter.
To navigate in a setup page
1.
Access the setup page you want using the appropriate function and parameter.
2.
Press NEXT to select the field or parameter to modify.
3.
Use the arrow keys or turn the adjustment knob to change the value.
The edited values are effective immediately.
4.8.1
Entering an Alphanumeric Value Using the Virtual Keyboard
A setup page containing one or more parameters with alphanumeric values also
contains a virtual keyboard. The virtual keyboard allows you to enter alphanumeric
characters without having to use a USB keyboard.
Software Interface
87
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
To enter an alphanumeric value using the virtual keyboard
1.
Access a setup page that contains parameters with alphanumeric values (see the
example of Figure 4-12 on page 88).
Figure 4-12 The Edit page with its virtual keyboard
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
88
Select the field that you want to edit using the NEXT button, and then choose
Edit.
On the virtual keyboard:
a)
Move the cursor on the character to be added by using the arrow keys or by
turning the adjustment knob.
b)
Select INS (F5 key).
Repeat step 3 to enter other characters.
To delete an already entered character:
a)
Move the cursor on the character to be deleted by pressing the double arrow
(F1) or (F2) keys.
b)
Select DEL (F4 key).
To save the entered data and exit the setup page, press NEXT until the Apply or
Create button is selected, and then press P1.
Chapter 4
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
4.8.2
Display Setup Page
The Display setup page allows you to set parameters that control aspects of the
display (see Figure 4-13 on page 89).
Figure 4-13 The Display setup page
To use the Display setup page
1.
Choose Display Setup (group 3/5).
2.
Press Display Setup (P1 key).
3.
Select the parameter you want to set up.
The available parameters are:
•
Live A-Scan Display
Sets the live A-scan drawing mode
— Outline
— Filled
Software Interface
89
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
NOTE
Envelope drawing mode is always opposite the selected Live A-Scan drawing mode.
•
X-Axis Grid Mode
Sets the horizontal X-axis grid display mode
— Off: no grid
— Standard: 10 divisions spaced evenly and labeled 1 to 10
— Soundpath: five divisions spaced evenly and labeled with corresponding
sound path values
— Leg: up to four divisions representing half-skip distances in angle beam
inspection mode, based on test piece thickness value, and labeled L1 to L4
•
Y-Axis Grid
Sets the vertical Y-axis grid display mode to 100 % or 110 % full screen height
•
Baseline (Baseline Break)
Modifies the appearance of the A-scan in full wave rectified mode. When
active, the instrument locates all zero cross points in the RF waveform and
pulls the full wave rectified A-scan to the baseline. This feature helps to see
small defects that are close to the back surface of the test piece, especially at
large ranges.
— On: Baseline Break enabled
— Off: Baseline Break disabled
•
VGA Output
Controls the output to the VGA connector.
— On
— Off
•
Brightness
Used to adjust the screen brightness or by choosing one of the preset values
(0 %, 25 %, 50 %, 75 %, or 100 %).
•
Color Scheme
Sets the overall instrument color scheme
— Default: default multi color display
— Classic: EPOCH 600 color scheme
— Outdoor W: white background, black text
90
Chapter 4
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
— Outdoor Y: yellow background, blue text
— Mono: Black background, white text
4.
4.8.3
Press
to return to the live screen.
Grid Setup Page
The Grid setup page allows you to activate and set up the Grid View feature for
visualization of data collection in the live A-scan screen. For more information on the
setup and use of the Grid View feature, see “Grid View” on page 217.
4.8.4
Reading Setup Page
The Reading setup page, shown in Figure 4-14 on page 91, allows you to select which
measurement appears in the measurement reading boxes at the top of the software
main display.
Information to be
displayed in the
measurement
reading boxes
Figure 4-14 The Reading setup page
Software Interface
91
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
To use the Reading setup page
1.
Choose Meas Setup (group 3/5).
2.
Press Reading Setup (P1 key).
3.
Select the parameter you want to set up.
•
Reading Selection
Sets the measurement reading box mode.
— Auto: Automatically makes the selection based on instrument function
— Manual: Readings correspond to the manually defined selections
•
Reading1 to Reading5
Each measurement reading box is defined independently when in manual
mode. Figure 4-14 on page 91 shows an example of the measurement reading
boxes and icons that indicate what type of measurement is being displayed.
Table 13 on page 92 presents the available measurement readings.
Reading 1
Reading 3
Reading 2
Reading 4
Reading 5
Figure 4-15 Example of measurement reading boxes with icons
Table 13 Available measurement readings
Icon
92
Measurement reading
Description
Gate 1 Thickness
Thickness in gate 1. Not used with Angle.
Gate 2 Thickness
Thickness in gate 2. Not used with Angle.
Gate 1 Soundpath Distance
Sound Path (Angular) distance in gate 1.
Gate 2 Soundpath Distance
Sound Path (Angular) distance in gate 2.
Chapter 4
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Table 13 Available measurement readings (continued)
Icon
Measurement reading
Description
Gate 1 Depth to Reflector
Depth to reflector in gate 1. Used with
Angle.
Gate 2 Depth to Reflector
Depth to reflector in gate 2. Used with
Angle.
Gate 1 Surface Distance
Horizontal distance to reflector in gate 1.
Used with Angle.
Gate 2 Surface Distance
Horizontal distance to reflector in gate 2.
Used with Angle.
Gate 1 Surface Dist – x Val
Horizontal distance minus X-Value
(distance from beam index point to front of
wedge) in gate 1. Used with Angle.
Gate 2 Surface Dist – x Val
Horizontal distance minus X-value
(distance from beam index point to front of
wedge) in gate 2. Used with Angle.
Gate 1 Minimum Depth
Minimum depth in gate 1. Resets on gate
adjustment and on most pulser/receiver
adjustments.
Gate 2 Minimum Depth
Minimum depth in gate 2. Resets on gate
adjustment and on most pulser/receiver
adjustments.
Gate 1 Maximum Depth
Maximum depth in gate 1. Resets on gate
adjustment and on most pulser/receiver
adjustments.
Gate 2 Maximum Depth
Maximum depth in gate 2. Resets on gate
adjustment and on most pulser/receiver
adjustments.
Gate 1 Current Amplitude
Amplitude measurement in gate 1.
Displays as % of full-screen height (FSH).
Gate 2 Current Amplitude
Amplitude measurement in gate 2.
Displays as % of full-screen height (FSH).
Gate 1 Maximum Amplitude Maximum amplitude in gate 1. Resets on
gate adjustment and on most
pulser/receiver adjustments.
Software Interface
93
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Table 13 Available measurement readings (continued)
Icon
Measurement reading
Description
Gate 2 Maximum Amplitude Maximum amplitude in gate 2. Resets on
gate adjustment and on most
pulser/receiver adjustments.
94
Gate 1 Minimum Amplitude
Minimum amplitude in gate 1. Resets on
gate adjustment and on most
pulser/receiver adjustments.
Gate 2 Minimum Amplitude
Minimum amplitude in gate 2. Resets on
gate adjustment and on most
pulser/receiver adjustments.
Gate 1 Amplitude to Curve
Amplitude measurement in gate 1.
Displays echo height as a percentage of
DAC/TCG curve height.
Gate 2 Amplitude to Curve
Amplitude measurement in gate 2.
Displays echo height as a percentage of
DAC/TCG curve height.
Gate 1 dB to Curve
Amplitude measurement in gate 1.
Displays echo dB value compared to curve
height where the curve equals 0 dB.
Gate 2 dB to Curve
Amplitude measurement in gate 2.
Displays echo dB value compared to curve
height where the curve equals 0 dB.
Gate 2–Gate 1 (Echo-to-Echo)
Gate 2 thickness minus gate 1 thickness
(echo-to-echo measurement).
AWS D1.1/D1.5 Weld Rating
(D)
D rating calculated for the gated echo.
Equivalent Reflector size
Equivalent reflector size (flat-bottom hole)
for DGS/AVG evaluation
Overshoot (OS)
Overshoot value in dB comparing echo
height to DGS/AVG curve.
API5UE Depth
Imperfection size (crack height) calculated
from API 5UE inspection procedure.
AWS A
AWS defect indication value A.
Chapter 4
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Table 13 Available measurement readings (continued)
Icon
4.
4.8.5
Press
Measurement reading
Description
AWS B
AWS reference indication value B.
AWS C
AWS sound path correction value C.
Gate1 Ref dB-Current Amp
Comparison value in dB measuring the
difference between the gate 1 echo height
and the reference gain.
Gate2 Ref dB-Current Amp
Comparison value in dB measuring the
difference between the gate 2 echo height
and the reference gain.
Gate1 − IF Gate
Gate 1 thickness minus interface gate
thickness (echo-to-echo measurement).
Gate2 − IF Gate
Gate 2 thickness minus interface gate
thickness (echo-to-echo measurement).
GateIF Thickness
Thickness in interface gate. Not used with
Angle.
to return to the live screen.
General Setup Page
The General setup page, shown in Figure 4-16 on page 96, allows you to configure
general parameters such as the user interface language and the instrument date mode.
Software Interface
95
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Figure 4-16 The General Setup page
To use the General setup page
1.
Choose Inst Setup (group 3/5).
2.
Press General (P1 key).
3.
Select the parameter you want to set up:
•
Language
Used to select the user interface language (English, Japanese, German,
French, Spanish, Russian, and Chinese).
•
Filter Group
Used to select receiver filter group.
•
Key Beep
Sounds an audible tone on every key press.
•
Alarm Beep
Used to activate an audible tone when a Gate Alarm is triggered.
•
Cal Lock
Used to lock access to all functions affecting calibration/waveform data. These
include: Basic, Pulser, Rcvr (receiver), and Trig settings, as well as Gain,
96
Chapter 4
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Range, and Delay. These parameters are crossed out when the Cal Lock
function is turned On.
•
Radix Type
Used to select the format used by the instrument to display numeric values
(radix) and the date.
•
Date Mode
Used to set the date format. You can choose between the dd/mm/yyyy and
mm/dd/yyyy formats.
•
File Open & Recall
— On
— Off
•
Communications Protocol
Used to select command type for remote/PC communication with the
instrument (Multi Char or Single Char). When communication with the
Olympus GageView Pro PC software, Multi Character mode must be
selected.
•
Communications Device
Used to select the type of remote/PC communication (USB or RS-232). When
communication with the Olympus GageView Pro PC software, USB mode
must be selected.
•
Baud Rate
Activated only when you select RS232 in the Communications Device box.
Baud rate on instrument must match baud rate on PC.
— 2400
— 9600
— 19200
— 38400
— 57600
— 115200
•
Test
— On
— Off
•
Corrosion Gage
Enables or disables the optional corrosion gage software.
— On
Software Interface
97
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
— Off
4.
4.8.6
Press
to return to the live screen.
About Page
The About page provides information about the instrument hardware and software
identification data (see Figure 4-17 on page 98).
Figure 4-17 The Status setup page
The About page has four sub-pages:
•
Battery Status
Provides information about the battery and the gage.
•
Regulatory
Displays regulatory information and labels.
•
Licenses
Displays all the licensing information
•
98
Upgrade
Chapter 4
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Allows you to upgrade the EPOCH 650 system software. See “Maintenance and
Troubleshooting” on page 297 for more information on upgrading your
EPOCH 650 instrument software.
4.8.7
Clock Setup Page
The Clock setup page, shown in Figure 4-18 on page 99, allows you to configure the
date and time settings for the instrument.
Figure 4-18 The Clock setup page
To use the Clock setup page
1.
Choose Inst Setup (group 3/5).
2.
Press Clock (P3 key).
3.
Select the parameter you want to set up:
•
Year
Used to set the year for the instrument internal clock.
•
Month
Used to set the month for the instrument internal clock.
•
Day
Software Interface
99
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Used to set the day of the month for the instrument internal clock.
•
Mode
Used to set the hour display mode (12 Hour or 24 Hour) for the instrument
internal clock.
•
Hour
Used to set the hour for the instrument internal clock.
•
Minute
Used to set the minutes for the instrument internal clock.
4.
Press Set (P1) key to save the parameters.
4.8.8
Software Options Setup Page
The Software Options page allows you to enter an activate code to allow access to a
software option not included with the standard package of instrument features. This
is provided by an Olympus representative after the purchase of a particular software
option. See “Defining Licensed and Unlicensed Software Features” on page 225 for
details on software option activation.
4.8.9
Misc Setup Page
The Misc (miscellaneous) page allows you to perform imports and exports of
instrument files such as language support files, DGS/AVG custom probe files and
XML schema files. The Misc page also allows you to perform a batch backup or
restoration of the entire data logger to archive or clone data from a particular
instrument.
To use the Misc page
1.
Choose Inst Setup (group 3/5).
2.
Press Misc (P5 key).
3.
Use the arrow keys or adjustment knob to select the action you want to initiate.
4.
Press Start to initiate the selected action.
Following are the available actions:
•
Copy Language Bin File from External SD Card
Imports a language file from the microSD card to internal memory to update
user interface translations.
•
100
Copy Language Bin File to External SD Card
Chapter 4
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Exports current language file from internal memory to the microSD card.
•
Copy XML Schema File from External SD Card
Imports XML Schema file from the microSD card to internal memory to
support file exports in the XML format (see “Manage Menu” on page 208 for
more information on XML files).
•
Copy XML Schema File to External SD Card
Exports the current XML Schema file from internal memory to the microSD
card (see “Manage Menu” on page 208 for more information on XML files).
•
Copy DGS Custom Probe File from External SD Card
Imports new custom DGS/AVG probe library from the microSD card to
internal memory (see “DGS/AVG” on page 240 for more information).
•
Copy DGS Custom Probe File to External SD Card
Exports current DGS/AVG custom probe library from internal memory to the
microSD card (see “DGS/AVG” on page 240 for more information).
•
Backup from Internal to External SD Card
Backs up all data logger files and live instrument settings to a single file on
the microSD card for data archiving or instrument cloning.
•
Restore from External SD Card to Internal
Restores all data logger files and live instrument settings from the microSD
card to internal memory from a previously backed up file.
IMPORTANT
Restore permanently overwrites all existing data on the EPOCH 650 with data from
the microSD card.
Software Interface
101
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Figure 4-19 Misc setup page
NOTE
The Debug button (P6 key) is intended for use by an authorized Olympus service
center or customer service representative only.
4.8.10
Editable Parameters Page
The Editable Parameters page allows you to customize preset values for direct access
keys or coarse adjustment lists (see Figure 4-20 on page 103).
When using the dB (gain), RANGE, or DELAY direct access keys, a set of preset values
appears over the parameter keys at the bottom of the screen. These values are set in
the Gain, Range, and Delay rows in the Editable Parameters setup page. See “DirectAccess Parameters” on page 76 for information on the dB, RANGE, or DELAY
parameter keys.
Values in the Editable Parameters setup page are also used when making coarse
adjustments with the navigation pad or adjustment knob to the following parameters:
102
Chapter 4
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
•
Pulser Frequency
•
Trigger Angle
•
Basic Velocity
•
Trigger Thickness
•
Trigger X value
See “Parameter Adjustment” on page 52 for information on using the navigation pad
or adjustment knob.
The Editable Parameters setup page displays all the system parameters that can be
edited. The page layout is similar to a spreadsheet. The data is laid out in rows and
columns.
Figure 4-20 Editable Parameters setup page
To edit parameters
1.
Choose Inst Setup (group 3/5).
2.
Press Edit Parameters (P6 key).
3.
Press NEXT to move across the rows to highlight the parameter you want to
change.
Software Interface
103
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
4.
Use the adjustment knob or arrow keys to change the value of the selected
parameter value.
5.
To erase the value of a selected parameter, press Clear (P1 key).
4.8.11
Analog Output Setup Page
The analog output setup parameters are located in the A-Out setup page. See “Analog
Output” on page 139.
104
Chapter 4
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
5. Adjusting the Pulser/Receiver
This chapter describes how to adjust the EPOCH 650 ultrasonic flaw detector
pulser/receiver.
5.1
Adjusting the System Sensitivity (Gain)
To adjust the system sensitivity
1.
Press dB.
2.
Adjust the system sensitivity (gain) in either coarse or fine increments.
The total system sensitivity is 110 dB.
5.2
Using the AUTO XX% Feature
The AUTO XX% feature was formerly known as the AUTO-80 % in the EPOCH 4
Series. The default setting for AUTO XX% in the EPOCH 650 ultrasonic flaw detector
is 80 % full-screen height (FSH). You can adjust the FSH target value to meet the
demands of the application.
The AUTO XX% feature is used to quickly adjust the instrument gain (dB) setting to
bring the gated peak echo to XX% FSH. AUTO XX% is especially useful for bringing
the echo from a reference indication to XX% FSH to establish the instrument’s
reference gain level (see “Setting Reference Gain and Scanning Gain” on page 106 for
further information).
Adjusting the Pulser/Receiver
105
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
You can use the AUTO XX% feature to bring an echo to XX% FSH in any gate.
To use AUTO XX% feature
1.
Press GATES to select the gate that measures the echo to be adjusted.
2.
Press 2ND F, (AUTO XX%) to activate the AUTO XX% feature.
AUTO XX% can be activated at any time during operation. If you do not actively
select a gate, AUTO XX% is applied to Gate 1.
5.3
Setting Reference Gain and Scanning Gain
Establishing the current system gain as the reference (base) level is useful for
inspections that require adding or subtracting scanning gain based on the relation to a
fixed gain level.
To set reference gain and adjust
1.
Press 2ND F, (REF dB).
The gain display reads: REF XX.X + 0.0 dB. Scanning gain can now be added or
subtracted.
2.
Adjust the scanning gain in either coarse or fine increments.
While using the reference gain and scanning gain, the following parameters appear at
the bottom of the screen.
•
Add
Used to add the current scanning gain to the current reference gain for “transfer
correction.”
•
Scan Db
Used to toggle the scanning gain from the active level to 0.0 dB (reference level)
allowing a direct amplitude comparison to the reference indication.
•
Off
Used to exit the reference gain function without adding the scanning gain to the
base instrument gain.
106
Chapter 5
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
•
+6 dB
Used to add 6 dB to the reference gain. You add 6 dB each time you press this
button.
•
–6 dB
Used to subtract 6 dB from the reference gain. You subtract 6 dB each time you
press this button.
5.4
Pulser Adjustments
The pulser settings in the EPOCH 650 ultrasonic flaw detector are accessible from the
Pulser menu item. The pulser setup parameters are:
•
Pulse Repetition Frequency (PRF)
•
Pulse Energy (Voltage)
•
Damping
•
Test Mode
•
Pulser Type
•
Pulser Frequency Selection (Pulse Width)
5.4.1
Pulse Repetition Frequency (PRF)
Pulse repetition frequency (PRF) is a measure of how often the transducer is being
pulsed by the electronic circuitry in the EPOCH 650 ultrasonic flaw detector.
PRF is typically adjusted based on the test method or test piece geometry. For parts
with long sound paths, it is necessary to lower the PRF to avoid wrap-around
interference that results in spurious signals on the display. For applications with rapid
scanning, it is often necessary to use a high PRF rate to assure that small defects are
detected as the probe moves along the part.
The EPOCH 650 allows you to manually adjust the PRF from 10 Hz to 2000 Hz in
50 Hz (coarse) or 10 Hz (fine) increments. The instrument also has two Auto-PRF
settings to automatically adjust the PRF based on screen range.
To select a PRF adjustment method
 Select Pulser > PRF Mode, and then vary the setting. The available choices are:
Adjusting the Pulser/Receiver
107
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Auto
Used to automatically set the PRF value based on the chosen screen range.
Manual
Used to manually set the PRF value.
To adjust the PRF value in Manual PRF Mode
1.
Select Pulser > PRF Mode = Manual.
2.
Select PRF, and then adjust the PRF in either coarse or fine increments.
The EPOCH 650 is a single-shot instrument. This means that the instrument acquires,
measures, and draws the complete A-scan with each pulse rather than using multiple
acquisitions to construct a full waveform. The measurement rate in the EPOCH 650 is
always equal to the PRF rate unless you are using a multiplexer.
5.4.2
Pulse Energy (Voltage)
The EPOCH 650 ultrasonic flaw detector can adjust the pulse energy from 0 V to
400 V in increments of 100 V. With this flexibility, you can set the pulse energy from to
a minimum when you want to extend the battery life, or provide a very high power
pulser for the most difficult materials.
To adjust the pulser energy
 Choose Pulser > Energy, and then vary the value. In the Energy adjustment,
coarse and fine steps are equal (100 V).
To maximize instrument battery life and transducer life, it is recommended that you
use lower energy settings when the application permits. For most applications, the
energy setting does not need to exceed 200 V.
108
Chapter 5
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
5.4.3
Damping
The damping control allows you to optimize the waveform shape for high resolution
measurements using an internal resistive circuit. There are four damping settings on
the EPOCH 650 ultrasonic flaw detector: 50 Ω, 100 Ω, 200 Ω, or 400 Ω.
To adjust the Damping
 Choose Pulser > Damp, and then vary the setting.
Generally, the lowest resistance (Ω) setting increases the system damping and
improves near-surface resolution, while the highest resistance setting decreases
system damping and improves the instrument penetration power.
Selecting the correct damping setting fine-tunes the EPOCH 650 in order to operate
with a particular transducer selection. Depending on the transducer being used, the
various damping settings either improve near-surface resolution or improve the
instrument’s penetration power.
5.4.4
Test Mode
The EPOCH 650 ultrasonic flaw detector can operate in three test modes that you can
select using the Pulser > Mode parameter:
•
P/E
Used to select pulse-echo mode, where a single element transducer sends and
receives the ultrasonic signal. Use either transducer connector.
•
Dual
Used to select pitch-and-catch mode, where a dual-element transducer has one
element that transmits the ultrasonic signal and another element that receives the
signal. Use the T/R labeled transducer connection as the transmit connector.
•
Thru
Used to select the through transmission mode, where two separate transducers
are typically located on opposite sides of the test specimen. One transducer
transmits the ultrasonic signal, the other receives. Use the T/R labeled transducer
connection as the transmit connector.
Adjusting the Pulser/Receiver
109
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
To compensate for the one-way sound path in through transmission (Thru) mode, the
EPOCH 650 does not divide transit time by two when calculating thickness
measurements.
To adjust the test mode
 Choose Pulser > Mode, and then vary the setting.
5.4.5
Pulser Type
The EPOCH 650 operates in two pulser modes that you can select using the Pulser
parameter of the Pulser mode:
Spike
Used to mimic a traditional spike pulse by using a narrow-width pulse to excite
the transducer.
Square
Used to tune the width of the pulse to optimize the response of the transducer.
The EPOCH 650 uses the PerfectSquare technology to achieve optimum response
from the tunable square wave pulser. This PerfectSquare technology maximizes the
energy used to drive the connected transducer while providing excellent near-surface
resolution.
To adjust the pulser waveform
 Select Pulser > Pulser, and then vary the setting.
110
Chapter 5
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
5.4.6
Pulser Frequency Selection (Pulse Width)
The pulser frequency selection sets the pulse width when Pulser > Pulser = Square.
This frequency selection allows you to tune the shape and duration of each pulse to
obtain the best performance from the transducer being used. In general, the best
performance is achieved by tuning the pulser frequency as close as possible to the
center frequency of the transducer being used.
To adjust the pulser frequency
 Choose Pulser > Freq, and then vary the setting.
Actual results could vary due to the test material and/or variation in the transducer
center frequency. Try various settings with a transducer and test piece to maximize
ultrasonic performance.
5.5
Receiver Adjustments
The receiver settings are accessed from the Rcvr menu. The receiver parameters are:
•
Digital Receiver Filters
•
Waveform Rectification
5.5.1
Digital Receiver Filters
The has a total instrument bandwidth of 0.2–26.5 MHz at −3 dB. The instrument offers
30 standard fixed digital filters. These are designed to improve the instrument’s
signal-to-noise ratio by filtering out unwanted high and/or low frequency noise
outside of the test frequency spectrum. The Standard filter set also allows the
instrument to provide the dynamic range (dB) required by EN12668-1:2010.
In most cases, you should select either a broadband filter or a narrow-band filter that
covers the frequency of the transducer being used. Due to the shifting of frequency
spectrum in most materials, it might be necessary to adjust the filter settings to
maximize instrument performance. Every material is different, and you must
optimize the receiver settings based on the application.
Adjusting the Pulser/Receiver
111
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
The EPOCH 650 ultrasonic flaw detector contains the following seven (7) standard
filters compliant with EN12668-1:2010.
•
2.0 MHz–21.5 MHz
•
0.2 MHz–10.0 MHz
•
0.2 MHz–1.2 MHz
•
0.5 MHz–4.0 MHz
•
1.5 MHz–8.5 MHz
•
5.0 MHz–15.0 MHz
•
8.0 MHz–26.5 MHz
The EPOCH 650 contains the following 23 Advanced filters which are not tested in
accordance with EN12668-1:2010 (see Table 14 on page 112).
Table 14 Advanced filters
DC–10 MHz
DC–1.2 MHz
DC–4.0 MHz
DC–8.5 MHz
DC–15.0 MHz
DC–26.5 MHz
0.2 MHz–4.0 MHz
0.2 MHz–8.5 MHz
0.2 MHz–15.0 MHz
0.2 MHz–26.5 MHz
0.5 MHz–8.5 MHz
0.5 MHz–10.0 MHz
0.5 MHz–15.0 MHz
0.5 MHz–26.5 MHz
1.0 MHz –3.5 MHz
1.5 MHz–10.0 MHz
1.5 MHz–15.0 MHz
1.5 MHz–26.5 MHz
2.5 MHz–7.0 MHz
5.0 MHz–10.0 MHz
5.0 MHz –26.5 MHz
6.0 MHz–12.0 MHz
8.0 MHz–15.0 MHz
To select either the Standard or Advanced filter sets
1.
Choose Instr Setup > General (group 3/5).
2.
Press NEXT to select Filter Group.
3.
Select Standard or Advanced.
To adjust the Filter
 Choose Rcvr > Filter, and then vary the filter setting.
112
Chapter 5
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
5.5.2
Waveform Rectification
The EPOCH 650 ultrasonic flaw detector can operate in one of four different
rectification modes that you can select using the Rcvr > Rect parameter: Full, Half+,
Half-, or RF (unrectified).
The RF mode is not active while operating in special software feature modes, such
as DAC mode or Peak Memory.
To adjust the Rectification
 Choose Rcvr > Rect, and then change the rectification setting.
Adjusting the Pulser/Receiver
113
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
114
Chapter 5
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
6. Managing Special Waveform Functions
This chapter describes how to manage special waveform functions of the EPOCH 650
ultrasonic flaw detector.
6.1
Reject
The Rcvr > Reject parameter allows you to eliminate unwanted, low-level signals
from the display. The reject function is linear and adjustable from 0 % to 80 % FSH.
Increasing the reject level does not affect the amplitude of the signals above the reject
level.
The reject function can also be used in the unrectified Rcvr > Rect = RF mode.
The reject level is displayed as an horizontal line on the instrument display (see
Figure 6-1 on page 116) or two lines in the case of the unrectified Rcvr > Rect = RF
mode.
Managing Special Waveform Functions
115
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Reject level line
Figure 6-1 Horizontal line indicating the reject level
6.2
Peak Memory
The peak memory function enables the display to capture and store on the screen the
amplitude of each A-scan acquisition. The display updates each pixel if a signal of
greater amplitude is acquired. When you scan the transducer over a reflector, the
signal envelope (echo dynamic as a function of transducer position) is held on the
screen as a green line (see Figure 6-2 on page 117). In addition, the current, live
waveform is displayed at the appropriate place within the signal envelope.
116
Chapter 6
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Current live waveform (green
line)
Peak memory signal envelope
(blue area)
Peak memory flag
Figure 6-2 Peak memory signal envelope example
This function is useful when it is necessary to find the peak from an indication during
an angle beam inspection.
The peak memory function cannot be activated in the unrectified Rcvr > Rect = RF
mode.
To activate peak memory function
1.
Press PEAK MEM.
The
symbol appears in the flag area to indicate that the function is active.
2.
Scan over a reflector to acquire the echo envelope.
3.
Press PEAK MEM again to turn off the peak memory function.
Managing Special Waveform Functions
117
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
6.3
Peak Hold
The peak hold function is similar to peak memory as it captures the current screen
when the function is accessed. The difference is that with peak hold, the captured
waveform is frozen on the screen and does not update even if the live waveform
exceeds the frozen waveform’s amplitude.
Peak hold is useful when you want to obtain a waveform from a known sample and
compare it to a waveform from an unknown test piece. Similarities and/or differences
in the waveforms can be noted to help determine the acceptance criteria for the
unknown material.
To activate peak hold
1.
Obtain an echo on the screen.
2.
Press 2ND F, (PEAK HOLD).
This captures the screen and still allows viewing of the live waveform. The
symbol appears on the right side of the A-scan display indicating that the
function is active.
3.
6.4
Press 2ND F, (PEAK HOLD) again to shut off the peak hold function.
Freeze
The freeze function holds, or freezes, the information on the screen at the moment at
the moment it is activated. Once the freeze function is activated, the pulser/receiver of
the EPOCH 650 ultrasonic flaw detector becomes inactive and does not acquire any
further data. A freeze ( ) symbol appears on the right side of the screen indicating
that the function is active.
There are two ways to activate the freeze function: manual and automatic. Manual
freeze requires you to press the FREEZE key to activate the function. Automatic freeze
(Auto-Freeze) allows you to automatically activate the freeze function based on any
triggered gate alarm.
To activate the freeze function manually
 Press FREEZE.
118
Chapter 6
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
To activate the freeze function automatically
1.
Enable at least one gate alarm function (see “Gate Alarms” on page 133)
2.
In the gate menu, set AFREEZE = On
To deactivate the freeze function
 Press FREEZE to deactivate a manual or automatic freeze.
The freeze function is useful when storing waveforms because it holds the current Ascan. This allows the transducer to be removed from the test piece. Once the display is
frozen, you can use a variety of instrument functions. These include:
•
Gate movement
To position the gate(s) over area(s) of interest to obtain measurement data.
•
Gain
To amplify signals of interest or to reduce the amplitude of signals when highscanning gain values are being used.
•
Range and delay
To manipulate the time base to focus on the area of interest. The total instrument
range cannot be increased, but can be decreased to “zoom in” on a certain area of
the frozen waveform.
•
Rectification
To adjust the rectification view of the frozen waveform
•
Data logging
•
Printing
When the freeze function is active, the following parameters cannot be
changed/accessed:
6.5
•
Zero offset
•
Range (cannot be increased)
•
Pulser/Receiver settings such as PRF, Energy, Mode, pulser waveform, and Filter
Grid Modes
The EPOCH 650 ultrasonic flaw detector provides multiple grid modes for easy Ascan interpretation, depending on the application.
Managing Special Waveform Functions
119
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
To adjust the grid modes
1.
Select Display Setup > Display Setup to open the Display setup menu.
2.
Press NEXT to move the focus to the X-Axis Grid Mode parameter (see Figure 6-3
on page 120).
Figure 6-3 Selecting the x-axis grid mode
3.
120
Use the adjustment knob or keypad to select the desired x-axis grid mode (see
Figure 6-4 on page 121).
Chapter 6
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Standard grid: traditional flaw detector view with
10 divisions equally spaced across the screen range,
and the numbers 1–10 appearing below each division.
Sound Path grid: displaying actual sound path
measurements at equally spaced increments along the
horizontal axis. This mode displays 5 divisions, each
labeled with its corresponding sound path value
(depending on the Basic > Range, Basic > Delay, and
Meas Setup > Units settings).
Leg grid: displaying vertical lines representing angle
beam inspection legs. This mode displays up to 4
divisions, labeled L1 to L4, which represent each halfskip distance of a test piece during an angle beam
inspection. The spacing and number of divisions
displayed depends on the Basic > Range, Basic >
Delay, and Trig > Thick (material thickness)
parameters.
Figure 6-4 The x-axis grid modes
4.
Move the focus to the Y-Axis grid Mode parameter.
5.
Select the desired y-axis grid mode (see Figure 6-5 on page 122).
Managing Special Waveform Functions
121
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
100 % (zero % to
100 % scale)
100 % (zero % to
110 % scale)
Figure 6-5 The y-axis grid modes: 100 % (left), 110 % (right)
6.6
Baseline Break
The baseline break feature modifies the appearance of the A-scan in full wave
rectified mode. When Baseline Break is active, the instrument identifies all “zero
cross” points as lines connecting individual A-scan lobes to the baseline on the
display. This feature can help to visually separate far surface defect echoes from the
back surface echo.
To activate the Baseline Break function
122
1.
Choose Display Setup > Display Setup.
2.
Set Baseline Break to On.
Chapter 6
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
7. Gates
This chapter describes how to use the gates of the EPOCH 650 ultrasonic flaw
detector.
7.1
Measurement Gates 1 and 2
The EPOCH 650 ultrasonic flaw detector has two independent flaw gates. In the Ascan, a gate is represented by an horizontal line with fixed start and end points. The
length and horizontal position of the line identifies the sound path range, while the
vertical position of the gate line represents a threshold amplitude level for echoes of
interest. In the EPOCH 650, gate 1 appears as a solid red line while gate 2 appears as a
hollow blue line.
Gate 1 (red)
Gate 2 (blue)
Figure 7-1 Gate 1 and gate 2 (with echo-to-echo turned on)
Gates
123
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Both gates can be used to take thickness measurements with straight-beam
transducers, sound path and depth measurements with angle beam transducers,
measure signal amplitude, measure time-of-flight in microseconds, or to trigger
threshold and minimum-depth alarms. The gates can also be used together to take
echo-to-echo thickness measurements.
You can control the gates using the parameters in the Gate 1 and Gate 2 menus (see
Figure 7-2 on page 124).
Figure 7-2 The Gate 1 menu
The available gate parameters are:
Zoom
Used to zoom the display on the width of the gate (see “Zooming on a Gate” on
page 132 for details).
Start
Used to adjust the gate start position.
Width
Used to adjust the gate width.
Level
Used to adjust the vertical position of the gate.
124
Chapter 7
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Alarm
Used to select a gate alarm condition (see “Gate Alarms” on page 133 for details).
AFreeze
Visible only when Alarm is Positive or Negative. Activates or deactivates the
Auto Freeze function (for more information, see “Freeze” on page 118).
Min Depth
Used to adjust the minimum depth value which triggers a minimum depth alarm.
This parameter will only be available if Alarm = MinDepth.
Status
Used to toggle the state (On and Off) of the gate.
7.2
Quickly Adjusting Basic Gate Parameters
You can perform basic gate adjustments using the GATES direct-access key.
To quickly adjust the position of a gate
1.
Press the GATES direct-access key.
The focus moves to direct-access gate parameter box on the right side of the main
display. The gate parameter box shows the first available gate parameter (see
Figure 7-3 on page 125).
Direct-access gate button
Figure 7-3 The direct-access gate parameter box
2.
Edit the value using coarse or fine increments.
3.
To select a different parameter for the selected gate, or a parameter in another
active gate, press the GATES key until the desired parameter is selected.
Gates
125
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Successive presses of the GATES key will scroll through the following parameters:
G1Start, GIWidth, G1Level, G2Start, G2Width, and G2Level.
The GATES key only allows access to gates which are currently active. To activate a
gate, select Gate<n> > Status = On.
4.
Once the desired parameter has been selected, edit the value using coarse or fine
increments. When needed, toggle between the coarse and fine adjustment mode.
When adjusting a gate using the direct-access GATES key, the parameter key menu
along the bottom of the screen disappears, and Gates becomes the active parameter.
To return to the previously selected submenu, press either the
or NEXT key. This
allows you to make fast adjustments to the gate position and immediately return to
the parameter of the previous operation.
7.3
Gate Measurement Modes
The EPOCH 650 ultrasonic flaw detector’s two gates provide measurements of a
gated indication based on one of four possible measurements modes. You can define
the measurement mode of each gate in the Gate Setup menu (shown in Figure 7-4 on
page 127).
126
Chapter 7
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Figure 7-4 The Gate Setup menu
When a measurement is in progress using one of the measurement gates, a small
triangle appears on the gate to indicate from which echo/point the measurement is
being acquired (see Figure 7-5 on page 128 and Figure 7-6 on page 129). The available
parameters are:
G(1,2) Mode
Each gate can make measurements using the following modes:
Edge
Acquires measurement readings based on the position of the first crossing
point of a gated signal. The indication must break the threshold of the gate for
a measurement to be acquired. Also known as the flank mode.
Peak
Acquires measurement readings based on the position of the highest peak
within the gated screen range. The indication does not have to break the gate
threshold for a measurement to be acquired.
1stPeak
Acquires measurement readings based on the position of the first peak to
break the threshold of the gate within the gated region.
Gates
127
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
J-Flank
Acquires thickness measurement readings based on the position of the first
crossing point of a gated signal and amplitude measurement readings from
the highest peak of the first echo in the gated region (see Figure 7-6 on
page 129)
Edge
Peak
Figure 7-5 Trigger indicator on gate in Edge and Peak modes
128
Chapter 7
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
1st Peak
J-Flank
Figure 7-6 Trigger indicator on gate in 1stPeak, and J-Flank modes
G(1,2) RF
In unrectified (RF) mode, used to choose the polarity of the gate. Options include:
Dual
The gate appears in the positive and negative side of the X-axis. Position and
width are identical, and the gate level mirrors across the X-axis (example:
25 % and –25 %).
Positive
The gate appears only on the positive side of the x-axis.
Negative
The gate appears only on the negative side of the x-axis.
G(1,2) %Amp
In Edge mode only, this selection allows you to define the method for measuring
amplitude of the gated indication:
High Peak
Acquires the amplitude measurement of the indication from the highest peak
within the gate.
Gates
129
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
1stPeak
Acquires the amplitude measurement of the indication from the first peak
within the gate. The peak must break the threshold of the gate to be
measured. In this mode, you will now see two triangles appear on the gate.
The solid triangle indicates the point from which thickness or sound
path/depth measurements are being acquired. The hollow triangle indicates
the point from which the amplitude measurement is being made.
The EPOCH 650 does not acquire measurement readings unless the indication of
interest is within a gated region of the screen. You should be careful to adjust the
Start, Width, and Level of a measurement gate so that only the indication of interest
falls within the gated region, per the measurement mode definitions above.
7.4
Viewing Measurement Readings
The EPOCH 650 ultrasonic flaw detector provides five measurement reading boxes to
display acquired measurements. These measurement readings must be properly
defined to view the desired information from a given indication.
For more information on defining measurement reading boxes, and for a full list of
possible measurement readings, see “Reading Setup Page” on page 91.
7.5
Gate Tracking and Echo-to-Echo Measurements
The gate tracking feature of the EPOCH 650 ultrasonic flaw detector allows you to
make echo-to-echo measurements whenever this feature is required by an
application. Echo-to-echo measurements can be made between gate 2 —gate 1.
NOTE
Gate tracking can also be accomplished between either gate 1 or gate 2 and the
optional interface gate. See “Interface Gate” on page 271 for more information.
130
Chapter 7
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Gate tracking maintains a constant separation between the position of the indication
in the first gate and the start position of the second gate. With this dynamic mobility,
the tracking gate is always positioned where you want to measure other indications.
When gate tracking is active, the start position value of the tracking gate (the second
gate involved in the measurement) defines the separation between the gates, not a
fixed start position.
To make echo-to-echo measurements with gate 1 and gate 2
1.
Activate both gates by selecting Gate 1 > Status = On and Gate 2 > Status = On.
2.
As shown in the example of Figure 7-7 on page 131, position gate 1 over the first
echo to detect, and then position gate 2 over the second echo to detect.
The Gate 2 > Start position defines the separation between the position of the
indication in gate 1 and the start of gate 2.
Measurement of
distance between
indications in the
2 gates
Echo-to-echo flag
Figure 7-7 Echo-to-echo measurement example
3.
Set gate 2 as the tracking gate by selecting Gate Setup > G2 Tracks = On.
The echo-to-echo mode flag (
)appears on the right side of the display,
indicating that the instrument is measuring the distance between positions of the
indications in gate 1 and gate 2.
Gates
131
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
7.6
Operating in Time-of-Flight Mode
The EPOCH 650 ultrasonic flaw detector is capable of displaying time-of-flight (TOF)
sound path data for a gated indication. Time-of-flight is the location of the reflector in
terms of microseconds.
The time-of-flight mode does not divide the measurement reading value by two. The
entire time-of-flight through the test piece in both directions is displayed.
When the instrument is set up to display distances in time-of-flight mode, the Basic >
Velocity parameter becomes inactive. This is because the time-of-flight mode does not
use the material velocity to calculate sound path measurements.
To operate in time-of-flight mode
 Select Meas Setup > Unit = µs.
In time-of-flight mode, all distance measurements are displayed in microsecond
values instead of inches or millimeters.
7.7
Zooming on a Gate
The EPOCH 650 ultrasonic flaw detector allows you to quickly zoom the screen range
to provide fine resolution of a particular inspection zone. Using zoom, the instrument
automatically uses screen delay to bring the point that corresponds to the gate start to
the left side of the screen and adjusts the displayed range to match the gate width. The
new range equals the normal gate width. The lowest achievable value of the expanded
range is equivalent to the minimum range of the instrument at the current materialvelocity setting. When the zoom is active, the zoom flag (
of the display.
To zoom on a gate
132
1.
Select Gate 1 > Status or Gate 2 > Status (group 2/5).
2.
Press On (P7 key) to activate the gate.
Chapter 7
)appears on the right side
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
3.
Position the gate to the desired position.
4.
Press Zoom (P1 key) to zoom in.
5.
Press Zoom again to zoom out (default view).
Zoom can only be active for one gate at a time.
7.8
Gate Alarms
The EPOCH 650 ultrasonic flaw detector features a variety of alarm configurations for
each measurement gate. In unrectified (RF) mode, these alarms can be used in
positive, negative, or dual gate modes.
By default, when an alarm condition is triggered, the EPOCH 650 emits an audible
beep. The instrument also illuminates the red indicator, above the display window,
corresponding to the gate with which the alarm has been triggered. To toggle the
audible alarm on and off, see “General Setup Page” on page 95.
The three primary types of gate alarms are positive threshold, negative threshold, and
minimum depth.
When an alarm condition is triggered on a particular gate, the corresponding alarm
output pin on the Digital Out connector provides a 5V TTL signal. For more
information, see “Alarm Outputs” on page 137.
7.8.1
Threshold Alarms
Threshold alarms can be set on gate 1 or gate 2.
A positive logic alarm is triggered when a signal breaks the gate threshold. A negative
logic alarm is triggered when a signal drops out of the gate threshold.
When you set a threshold alarm, the appearance of the tick marks at the end of the
gate changes. For positive logic alarms, the tick marks point upward and for negative
logic alarms they point downward (see Figure 7-8 on page 134). All alarm conditions
are stored in the EPOCH 650 data logger when the gate alarm is active and triggered
at the time of file storage. All saved IDs with an active alarm display A1 for gate 1
alarm, A2 for gate 2 alarm, or AIF for interface gate alarm.
Gates
133
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Off
Positive
Negative
Figure 7-8 Gate tick marks indicating alarm threshold type
To set a threshold alarm
1.
Activate the gate by selecting Gate<n> > Status = On.
2.
Position the gate to cover the desired area.
3.
Choose Gate<n> > Alarm, and then select either the Positive or Negative
threshold alarm condition.
7.8.2
Minimum Depth Alarm
The EPOCH 650 ultrasonic flaw detector is equipped with a minimum depth alarm
that is triggered whenever the current thickness measurement reading falls below an
operator-defined level. The minimum depth alarm can be used either with a single
gate or in echo-to-echo measurement mode.
7.8.3
Minimum Depth Alarm with a Single Gate
When the minimum depth alarm is activated, a marker appears on the gate to visually
indicate the current setting (see Figure 7-9 on page 135). Any indication that exceeds
the gate threshold to the left of the marker triggers the alarm.
134
Chapter 7
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Minimum depth alarm marker
Figure 7-9 Minimum depth alarm marker
To set a minimum depth alarm
1.
Activate the gate by selecting Gate<n> > Status = On.
2.
Position the gate to cover the desired area.
3.
Select Gate<n> > Alarm = Min Depth
4.
Choose Gate<n> > Min Depth, and then adjust the desired minimum value. The
minimum depth alarm value must be greater than the gate start value and less
than the gate width value.
The Minimum Depth Alarm is not available when certain special functions
are enabled.
7.8.4
Minimum Depth Alarm with Gate Tracking
The EPOCH 650 ultrasonic flaw detector can use the minimum-depth alarm when
making echo-to-echo thickness measurements with gate tracking. When gate tracking
is active, the tracking gate moves side-to-side, tracking the position of the echo in the
non-tracking (first) gate. With gate tracking active, the Min Depth alarm threshold is
relative to the position of the echo in the non-tracking gate (first gate).
To set up a minimum depth alarm with gate tracking, follow the steps described in
“Minimum Depth Alarm with a Single Gate” on page 134.
Gates
135
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
136
Chapter 7
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
8. Programmable Inputs and Outputs
Some of the pins on the Digital Out connector can be programmed to accomplish
certain actions. The optional Analog Out connector can be programmed to output
information to an external device.
8.1
Alarm Outputs
The EPOCH 650 includes three dedicated alarm outputs that allow you to control an
external device based on an alarm condition (see Table 23 on page 305). Each alarm
output is a 5 V TTL digital signal that corresponds to the current alarm condition for
each gate. The three gate alarms that can be set are positive threshold, negative
threshold, and minimum depth (see “Gate Alarms” on page 133). When a gate alarm
is triggered, the corresponding alarm output switches from 0 V to 5 V TTL.
8.2
Serial/USB Command Protocol
The EPOCH 650 can be remotely controlled through either the Digital Out connector
or the USB Client port. A comprehensive series of remote commands is available to
allow you access to all functions of your instrument. Contact Olympus for further
information.
Through serial communication over either the Digital Out connector or the USB Client
port, you can connect the EPOCH 650 to a computer for communication with the
optional Olympus GageView Pro computer software.
Programmable Inputs and Outputs
137
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
8.3
Trigger Inputs and Outputs
The EPOCH 650 trigger synchronization capability allows the instrument to be used
with other devices or instruments. The trigger governs the timing of each instrument
pulse based on the chosen mode and, where applicable, external input. Trigger
synchronization is supported as either a trigger input or trigger output on a combined
signal through the Digital Out connector (see Table 23 on page 305). The trigger
modes are as follows:
•
Internal
This is the standard operational mode that internally controls the pulse timing
and frequency. When set to the internal mode, the EPOCH 650 outputs a
synchronization pulse that is identical in rate and timing to the pulse it is sending
to the transducer connectors.
•
External
This mode allows an external device to control the pulse timing and frequency of
the EPOCH 650 via the RXD pin located on the Digital Out connector (see
“EPOCH 650 15-pin digital port output” on page 305). When no external input
pulse is present on the RXD pin, no pulse is sent to the connected transducer(s),
and the EPOCH 650 appears to be nonresponsive.
•
Single
This mode allows you to manually control the instrument pulse timing and
frequency. You can also control the instrument via computer commands.
To use the trigger input and output
1.
Choose the Meas Setup > Special (group 3/5) menu, and select Trigger Mode.
2.
Adjust the trigger mode to the desired setting.
When in Single mode, the EPOCH 650 does not send a pulse to the connected
transducer(s) until the Check key (
) is pressed (or through remote commands
via the Digital Out or USB connector). If (
) is not pressed, or no remote
command is sent, the instrument appears to be nonresponsive.
You cannot simultaneously control both a trigger input and output.
138
Chapter 8
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
8.4
Encoder Inputs
The optional Olympus B-scan encoder BSCAN-ENC (U8779522) can be connected to
the EPOCH 650 Digital Out connector using the CBAS-10669-0010 (Q7790008)
encoder cable. This setup provides single axis quadrature encoder inputs exclusively
to the B-can feature embedded in the Corrosion Module (see “Corrosion Module” on
page 275). Other encoders instead of the BSCAN-ENC can be supported using
customized cables.
8.5
Analog Output
The EPOCH 650 ultrasonic flaw detector offers an optional programmable analog
output. This analog output allows the instrument to continuously output thickness or
amplitude information to an external device, such as a strip chart recorder or a
computer outfitted with an analog/digital converter card.
The information is output as a scaled voltage, on either a 0–1 V or 0–10 V scale. The
EPOCH 650 is connected to the external device by means of the analog output
LEMO 00 connector on the top of the instrument. Each scaled voltage is output at full
PRF rate up to 2 kHz.
To access the analog output setup parameters
1.
Choose Meas Setup > A-Out (group 3/5) to display the A-Out setup page (see
Figure 8-1 on page 141).
2.
Press NEXT to move through the form fields.
3.
Use the adjustment knob or keypad to select an available parameter setting:
•
Reading
Used to select the measurement type (thickness or amplitude) to output.
Available settings are:
— Gate1 Thickness
— Gate2 Thickness
— Gate1 Current Amplitude
— Gate2 Current Amplitude.
•
Output
Used to select the range of voltage output from the unit. Available settings
are:
Programmable Inputs and Outputs
139
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
— Off
— 0–1 V
— 0–10 V.
•
Mapping
Used to select the scale of the output voltage based on:
— Range: The current screen range
— GateWidth: The width of the selected output gate
— Fixed Range: A fixed screen range independent of the current screen
range.
•
Fixed Range
Used to set the fixed screen range of the scaled output when Mapping is set
to Fixed Range.
•
Load
Used to select the value for the impedance of the peripheral device measuring
the analog output of the EPOCH 650 instrument.
Matching the impedance of the output from the EPOCH 650 with the
impedance of the input to the peripheral device allows the instrument to
properly offset the analog output to produce predictable output voltages
based on screen measurements. For example, a measurement of 10 mm
(.393 in.) on a 100 mm (3.93 in.) screen range, with an analog output range of
0–10 V, should produce an analog output of 1 V. Without impedance
matching, the value can be skewed above or below the expected 1 V output
value (0.95 V or 1.02 V, etc).
140
Chapter 8
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Figure 8-1 The A-Out setup page
Programmable Inputs and Outputs
141
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
142
Chapter 8
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
9. Calibration
Calibrating the EPOCH 650 ultrasonic flaw detector is the process of adjusting the
unit so that it measures accurately on a particular material, using a particular
transducer at a particular temperature.
In calibrating the instrument, you set the zero offset and velocity parameters. The zero
offset (sometimes referred to as probe delay) is set to compensate for the dead time
between the firing of the main pulse and the entry of the sound into the test piece. The
velocity is set so that it matches the material velocity of the test piece.
The EPOCH 650 features advanced auto-calibration that provides for a fast and easy
calibration process. This section details the procedures to calibrate the EPOCH 650
using the four basic transducer configurations: straight beam, delay line, dual
element, and angle beam.
9.1
Basic Setup
Until you are completely comfortable operating the EPOCH 650 ultrasonic flaw
detector, we recommend using a basic setup procedure before starting the actual
calibration.
To setup the EPOCH 650 before calibrating
1.
Press dB to select an initial gain value that is appropriate for the calibration.
If the appropriate gain level is unknown, set the initial gain at 20 dB and adjust it
as necessary during calibration.
2.
Choose Basic > Velocity, (group 1/5) and then enter an approximate velocity for
the test material. See “Sound Velocities” on page 307 for a table with sound
velocities for various materials.
Calibration
143
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Note that the Velocity parameter is disabled when the instrument is in time-offlight (µs) mode. Select Meas Setup > Unit (group 3/5), then select mm or in to
enable the Velocity parameter.
3.
Choose Basic > Zero, and then adjust the zero offset of the instrument to 0.000 µs.
4.
Choose Basic > Range, then set the range based on the sound path range within
the selected calibration block.
Use more range than necessary to ensure all calibration echoes appear on the screen.
5.
Choose Basic > Delay, then set the screen delay to 0.00 mm or (0.000 in.).
6.
Choose Trig > Angle (group 1/5), and then enter the correct refracted angle for the
probe (0 for a straight beam probe, 45 for a 45° probe, etc.).
7.
Choose Trig > Thick, and then set the material thickness to 0.00 mm or (0.000 in.).
8.
Choose Rcvr > Reject (group 1/5), and then set the reject level to 0 %.
9.
Select Gate 1 > Status (group 2/5), and set it to On to activate gate 1.
10. Couple the transducer to the block, and then adjust the pulser and filter settings
to create a clean A-scan.
For more information on pulser and receiver adjustments, see “Pulser
Adjustments” on page 107 and “Receiver Adjustments” on page 111.
Use the auto measurement reading selection feature so that the EPOCH 650
automatically displays relevant thickness/sound path measurements during
calibration based on the instrument settings. For more information, see “Reading
Setup Page” on page 91.
9.2
Calibration Modes
The EPOCH 650 ultrasonic flaw detector features multiple calibration modes to
accurately meet the requirements of the selected transducer, calibration test block,
and application. These calibration modes can be adjusted in the Auto Cal menu.
There are two modes for straight beam transducers and two modes for angle beam
transducers.
144
Chapter 9
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
9.2.1
Straight Beam Modes
Straight beam calibrations can be performed by two methods. For the purposes of this
calibration discussion, straight beam refers to all zero-degree probes, including contact,
dual, delay line, immersion, etc. The two methods of straight beam calibration are:
•
Thickness
This standard straight beam calibration mode requires you to provide two
different, known material thicknesses to properly calibrate the instrument. The
thin material thickness allows for zero offset calibration, and the thick material
thickness allows for velocity calibration.
•
Echo-to-echo
This calibration mode allows you to use any echo-to-echo measurement to
calibrate for material velocity only. In echo-to-echo calibration, the effects that
cause zero offset are eliminated by gating a particular indication that represents
the start point of the measurement. A second gate is set to track that gated
indication to acquire a measurement.This means that you must only calibrate for
the material velocity of the sample to acquire accurate echo-to-echo
measurements. You can perform echo-to-echo measurements between G2–G1,
and this calibration mode will only be available if Gate 2 tracking is turned on (see
“Gate Tracking and Echo-to-Echo Measurements” on page 130).
9.2.2
Angle Beam Modes
Angle beam calibrations can be performed by two methods:
•
Sound path
This standard angle beam calibration mode uses the sound path measurement of
two different, known material thicknesses to properly calibrate the instrument.
Typically, these sound path measurements are made from the radius of a
calibration test block. The smaller (thin) sound path measurement allows for zero
offset calibration, and the larger (thick) sound path measurement allows for
velocity calibration.
•
Depth
This angle beam calibration mode uses the known depth of two different
reflectors to properly calibrate the instrument. Typically, these depth
measurements are made from side-drilled holes of equal size. For accurate
measurements, you must first verify the refracted angle of the transducer, as the
EPOCH 650 calculates depth values based on sound path and known refracted
Calibration
145
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
angle. The shallow reflector depth allows for zero offset calibration, and the deep
reflector depth allows for velocity calibration.
9.3
Calibrating with a Straight Beam Transducer
The sample straight beam calibration described below is performed using an
Olympus transducer part number A109S-RM, with a frequency of 5.0 MHz and an
element diameter of 13 mm (0.50 in.).
The calibration requires a test block with two known thicknesses made from the
material to be measured. Ideally, the two thicknesses should represent thicknesses
that are both below and above the expected thickness of the material being inspected.
For this example, Olympus standard 5-step steel test block (P/N: 2214E) is used. The
steps measure 0.100 in., 0.200 in., 0.300 in., 0.400 in., and 0.500 in.
If the EPOCH 650 is set to work in metric units, the calibration process is exactly the
same, except that the entries are in millimeters rather than inches.
To calibrate using a straight-beam transducer
1.
Follow the initial setup procedure outlined in “Basic Setup” on page 143.
2.
Connect the transducer to an appropriate cable and then connect the cable to
either of the transducer connectors at the top of the instrument.
3.
Choose Auto Cal > Type = Thickness.
4.
Couple the transducer to the thin calibration block step. For this example, the
transducer is coupled to the 0.200 in. step.
Depending on the frequency of the contact transducer being used, it might be
impossible to obtain a proper reading on very thin material.
5.
146
Use the G1Start button (P5 key) to position gate 1 so that the first back-wall echo
from the known thickness step exceeds the gate threshold.
Chapter 9
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
6.
Press dB, and then adjust the gain value so that the echo amplitude is at
approximately 80 %.
The AUTO XX% feature automatically adjusts the gain to set the gated echo
amplitude to XX% of full screen height (the default XX value is 80 %). To activate this
feature, press 2ND F, (AUTO XX%).
A thickness measurement reading appears in large text above the A-scan (see
Figure 9-1 on page 147).
Thickness measurement
Figure 9-1 Example of a gated signal for zero calibration
7.
Once a steady reading is achieved, choose Auto Cal > Cal-Zero.
The screen freezes and the Cal-Zero box appears (see Figure 9-2 on page 148).
Calibration
147
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Figure 9-2 Entering the Zero Cal thickness value
8.
Adjust the value to match the known thickness of the gated indication (0.200 in. in
this example), and then press Continue (P3 key) to continue to the second
calibration step (see Figure 9-3 on page 149). The thickness value used in this part
of the calibration will be stored for reference in the Cal-Zero parameter box.
To exit without acquiring calibration data, press Cancel (P1 key).
148
Chapter 9
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Figure 9-3 Example of a gated signal for velocity calibration
9.
Couple the transducer to the thick calibration block step.
In this example, the transducer is coupled to the 0.500 in. step.
10. Use the GATES key to position gate 1 so that the first back-wall echo from the
known thickness step exceeds the gate threshold.
11. Press dB to adjust the gain setting so that the echo amplitude is at approximately
80 %.
A thickness measurement reading appears in large text above the A-scan.
12. Once a steady reading is achieved, choose Auto Cal > Cal-Vel.
The screen freezes and the Enter Value for Velocity Cal box appears (see
Figure 9-4 on page 150).
Calibration
149
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Figure 9-4 Entering the Velocity Cal thickness value
13. Adjust the value to match the known thickness of the gated indication (0.500 in. in
this example), and then choose Done (P2 key) to complete the calibration process.
It is possible to auto-cal on a test block with only one known thickness. In this
scenario, leave the transducer coupled on the unique thickness, move the gate over to
one of the multiple back-wall echoes, and then enter the correct sound path thickness
(the appropriate multiple of the first back-wall echo) during the velocity portion of the
calibration.
9.4
Calibrating with a Delay Line Transducer
The sample delay line calibration described below is performed using Olympus
transducer part number V202-RM, with a frequency of 10.0 MHz and an element
diameter of 6 mm (0.25 in.).
150
Chapter 9
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
The calibration requires a test block with two known thicknesses, made from the
material to be measured. Ideally, the two thickness measurements are both below and
above the expected thickness of the material to be inspected. For this example, we are
using Olympus standard 5-step steel-test block, part number 2214E. The steps
measure 0.100 in., 0.200 in., 0.300 in., 0.400 in., and 0.500 in.
If the EPOCH 650 is set to work in metric units, the calibration process is exactly the
same, except that the entries are in millimeters rather than inches.
To calibrate using a delay line transducer
1.
Follow the initial setup procedure outlined in “Basic Setup” on page 143.
2.
Connect the transducer to an appropriate cable and then connect the cable to
either of the transducer connectors at the top of the instrument.
With a zero offset of 0.000 µs, the excitation pulse (or main bang) should appear
on the left side of the screen.
3.
Choose Basic > Zero (group 1/5), and then increase the value until the excitation
pulse moves off the left side of the screen and the interface echo from the end of
the delay line tip appears on the screen.
4.
Verify that the echo represents the end of the delay by tapping your finger on the
end of the couplant-coated delay line. This dampens the signal and the echo
should jump up and down on the screen.
5.
Choose Basic > Zero, and then increase the value to move this echo to the left side
of the screen so that it is barely visible.
Calibration
151
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Figure 9-5 Adjusting zero offset for the first delay line echo
6.
Select Auto Cal > Type = Thickness.
7.
Couple the transducer to the thin calibration block step. For this example, the
transducer is coupled to the 0.100 in. step.
8.
Use the G1Start button (P5 key) to position gate 1 so that the first back-wall echo
from the known thickness step exceeds the gate threshold.
9.
Press dB, and then adjust the gain value so that the echo amplitude is at
approximately 80 %.
The AUTO XX% feature automatically adjusts the gain to set the gated echo
amplitude to XX% of full screen height (the default XX value is 80 %). To activate this
feature, press 2ND F, (AUTO XX%).
A thickness measurement reading appears in large text above the A-scan (see
Figure 9-6 on page 153).
152
Chapter 9
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Thickness measurement
Figure 9-6 Example of a gated signal for zero calibration
Ensure that it is the first back-wall echo being gated, not a multiple echo from the end
of the delay line tip.
10. Once a steady reading is achieved, choose Auto cal > Cal-Zero.
The screen freezes and the Cal-Zero box appears (see Figure 9-2 on page 148).
Calibration
153
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Figure 9-7 Entering the Zero Cal thickness value
11. Adjust the value to match the known thickness of the gated indication (0.100 in. in
this example), and then press Continue (P3 key) to continue to the second
calibration step (see Figure 9-8 on page 155). The thickness value used in this part
of the calibration will be stored for reference in the Cal-Zero parameter box.
If you need to exit without acquiring calibration data, press Cancel (P1 key).
154
Chapter 9
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Figure 9-8 Example of a gated signal for velocity calibration
12. Couple the transducer to the thick calibration block step.
In this example, the transducer is coupled to the 0.500 in. step.
13. Use the G1Start button (P5 key) to position gate 1 so that the first back-wall echo
from the known thickness step exceeds the gate threshold.
14. Press dB, and then adjust the gain value so that the echo amplitude is at
approximately 80 %.
A thickness measurement reading appears in large text above the A-scan.
15. Once a steady reading is achieved, choose Auto Cal > Cal-Vel.
The screen freezes and the Cal-Vel box appears.
16. In the Cal-Vel box, adjust the value to match the known thickness of the gated
indication (0.500 in. in this example), and then choose Done to complete the
calibration process (see Figure 9-9 on page 156).
Calibration
155
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Figure 9-9 Entering the Velocity Cal thickness value
9.5
Calibrating on a Single Test Block of Known Thickness
You can also auto-calibrate on a single test block of known thickness. You can use
multiple back-wall echoes instead of coupling on both a thin step and a thick step. In
this scenario, leave the transducer coupled on the thin step, move the gate over to one
of the multiple back-wall echoes, and then enter the correct sound path thickness
(2, 3, 4, etc. multiple of the first back-wall echo) during the velocity portion of the
calibration.
9.6
Calibrating with a Dual Element Transducer
The sample dual element calibration described below is performed using an Olympus
transducer part number DHC711-RM with a frequency of 5.0 MHz and an element
diameter of 6 mm (0.25 in.).
156
Chapter 9
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
The calibration requires a test block with two known thicknesses made from the
material being measured. Ideally, the two thicknesses should represent thicknesses
that are both below and above the expected thickness of the material to be inspected.
For this example, Olympus standard 5-step steel test block (part number 2214E) is
used. It has steps measuring 0.100 in., 0.200 in., 0.300 in., 0.400 in., and 0.500 in.
If the EPOCH 650 is set to work in metric units, the calibration process is exactly the
same, except that the entries are in millimeters rather than inches.
Because of the acoustic characteristics of dual transducers, nonlinearity in the distance
calibration occurs as the thickness of the material decreases. The point of maximum
sensitivity is determined by the roof angle of the particular dual transducer. The
distance calibration should be performed using a step block that covers the range of
interest. Be careful when interpreting thickness measurement readings made outside
of the calibrated range. The EPOCH 650 does not have v-path correction; possibly
causing some nonlinearity within the calibrated range. The amount of nonlinearity
depends on the minimum thickness used in the calibration process.
The zero offset value of dual element transducers can vary significantly at extreme
temperatures. If the temperature changes more than a few degrees from the
temperature at which the zero offset value was established, recheck its value. If you
intend to make thickness measurements over a wide temperature range, you should
use Olympus D790-SM and D791 dual element transducers. These transducers are
designed for high-temperature applications and have built-in delay lines with a stable
sound velocity that does not change significantly with temperature.
To calibrate using a dual element transducer
1.
Follow the initial setup procedure outlined in “Basic Setup” on page 143.
2.
Connect the transducer to an appropriate cable, and then connect the cable to the
transducer connectors at the top of the instrument.
3.
Select Pulser > Mode = Dual.
4.
Press dB, and then increase the gain significantly so that the leading edges of the
back-wall echoes appear as nearly vertical lines on the screen.
5.
To use the leading edge when making thickness measurements, set the
measurement gate to the edge detection mode by selecting Gate Setup > G1
Mode = Edge.
Calibration
157
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
6.
Select Auto Cal > Type = Thickness.
7.
Couple the transducer to the thin calibration block step.
For this example, the transducer is coupled to the 0.100 in. step. As noted above, a
higher gain setting is required to produce a clean leading edge of the signal. Do
not be concerned with the jagged peaks of the echo. Concentrate on the leading
edge only.
8.
Use the G1Start button (P5 key) to position gate 1 so that the leading edge of the
first back-wall echo from the known thickness step exceeds the gate threshold.
9.
Press dB and adjust the gain setting so that the leading edge from the echo is as
close to vertical as possible.
A thickness measurement reading appears in large text above the A-scan.
Thickness measurement
Figure 9-10 Example of a gated signal for zero calibration
10. Once a steady reading is achieved, Choose Auto Cal > CAL Zero.
The screen freezes and the Cal-Zero box appears (see Figure 9-11 on page 159).
158
Chapter 9
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Figure 9-11 Entering the Zero Cal thickness value
11. Adjust the value to match the known thickness of the gated indication (0.100 in. in
this example), and then choose Continue to continue to the second calibration
step. The thickness value used in this part of the calibration will be stored for
reference in the Cal-Zero parameter box.
To exit without acquiring calibration data, press Cancel.
Calibration
159
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Figure 9-12 Example of a gated signal for velocity calibration
12. Couple the transducer to the thick calibration block step.
In this example, the transducer is coupled to the 0.500 in. step.
13. Use the G1Start button (P5 key) to position gate 1 so that the first back-wall echo
from the known thickness step exceeds the gate threshold. Adjust the gain so that
the echo amplitude is at approximately 80 %.
14. Once a steady reading is achieved, choose Auto Cal > CAL Velocity.
The screen freezes and the Enter Value for Velocity Cal box appears.
15. Adjust the value to match the known thickness of the gated indication (0.500 in. in
this example), and then choose Done to complete the calibration process (see
Figure 9-13 on page 161).
160
Chapter 9
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Figure 9-13 Entering the Velocity Cal thickness value
9.7
Calibrating in Echo-to-Echo Mode
The sample echo-to-echo calibration described below is performed using Olympus
delay line transducer part number V202-RM, with a frequency of 10.0 MHz and an
element diameter of 6 mm (0.25 in.).
In Echo-to-echo mode, the calibration requires a test block with only one known
thickness, made from the material to be measured. Ideally, the thickness measurement
is very close to the expected thickness of the material to be inspected. Echo-to-echo
mode measures the distance between two actual indications, one representing the
measurement start point and one representing the measurement end point. This
eliminates the need for zero offset calibration, since the effects that cause a zero offset
are accounted for by gating the start-point indication. Therefore, in an Echo-to-echo
mode calibration, the instrument must only calibrate for material velocity to provide
accurate readings.
For this example, we are using Olympus standard 5-step steel-test block, part number
2214E. The steps measure 0.100 in., 0.200 in., 0.300 in., 0.400 in., and 0.500 in.
Calibration
161
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
If the EPOCH 650 is set to work in metric units, the calibration process is exactly the
same, except that the entries are in millimeters rather than inches.
To calibrate in echo-to-echo mode using a delay line transducer
1.
Follow the initial setup procedure outlined in “Basic Setup” on page 143.
2.
Connect the transducer to an appropriate cable, and then connect the cable to
either of the conventional transducer connectors at the top of the instrument.
With a zero offset of 0.000 µs, the excitation pulse (or main bang) should appear
on the left side of the screen.
3.
Choose Basic > Zero, and then increase the value until the excitation pulse moves
off the left side of the screen and the interface echo from the end of the delay line
tip appears on the screen.
4.
Verify that the echo represents the end of the delay by tapping your finger on the
end of the couplant-coated delay line.
This dampens the signal and the echo should jump up and down on the screen.
5.
Choose Basic > Zero, and then increase the value to move this echo to the left side
of the screen so that it is barely visible.
At least two gates must be active to acquire an echo-to-echo measurement. Gate
Tracking must also be active.
6.
Activate gate 1 and gate 2, by selecting Gate 1 > Status = On and Gate 2 > Status =
On.
7.
Select Gate Setup > G2 Tracks = On so that gate 2 tracks gate 1.
For more information on gate tracking activation, see “Gate Tracking and Echo-toEcho Measurements” on page 130.
8.
Select Auto Cal > Type = G2-1.
9.
Couple the transducer to the calibration block.
For this example, the transducer is coupled to the 0.300 in. step.
10. Use the GATES key to position gate 1 so that the first back-wall echo from the
known thickness step exceeds the gate threshold.
11. Use the GATES key to position the separation of gate 1 and gate 2 so that the
second back-wall echo from the known thickness step exceeds the gate 2
threshold.
162
Chapter 9
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
12. Adjust the gain so that neither signal is saturated, and so that the echo amplitude
in gate 2 is above 50 %.
A thickness measurement reading appears in large text above the A-scan, labeled
2-1.
In attenuating materials, it might be impossible to bring the second indication above
50 % while avoiding saturation of the first signal. If this is true, try using the Edge
detection mode instead of the peak detection to ensure accurate measurements (see
“Gate Measurement Modes” on page 126 for details).
Ensure that gate 1 and gate 2 are capturing successive back-wall echoes, not multiple
echoes from the end of the delay line tip.
Thickness measurement
Figure 9-14 Example of gated signals for velocity calibration
Calibration
163
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
13. Once a steady reading is achieved, choose Auto Cal > Cal-Vel.
The screen freezes and the Cal-Vel box appears (see Figure 9-15 on page 164.
Figure 9-15 Entering the Velocity Cal thickness value
14. Adjust the value to match the known thickness of the gated indication (0.300 in. in
this example), and then choose Done to complete the calibration process.
If for any reason you need to exit without acquiring calibration data, press Cancel.
164
Chapter 9
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
9.8
Calibrating to Known Sound Path Values with an Angle Beam
Transducer
The following sample angle beam calibration procedure is performed using an
Olympus transducer part number A430S-SB with a frequency of 2.25 MHz and an
element size of 15.88 mm × 15.88 mm (0.625 in. × 0.625 in.). The transducer is mounted
on a 45° wedge, part number ABWS-6-45. An Olympus IIW Type I carbon-steel
calibration block, part number TB7541-1, is used.
To calibrate using an angle beam transducer
1.
Follow the initial setup procedure outlined in “Basic Setup” on page 143.
2.
Connect the transducer to an appropriate cable, and then connect the cable to
either of the conventional transducer connectors at the top of the instrument.
3.
Choose Trig > Angle, and then enter the correct refracted angle for the
transducer/wedge combination (45° for this example).
4.
Choose Basic > Velocity, and then enter the approximate shear-wave velocity of
the material being inspected (3.240 m/s (0.1280 in./µs) in this example using
carbon steel).
5.
Choose Basic > Range, and then enter an appropriate range for the test block
being used (300.00 mm (12.000 in.) in this example using carbon steel).
Review the following procedures:
•
“Locating the Beam Index Point” on page 165
•
“Verifying the Refracted Angle” on page 167
•
“Calibrating for Distance” on page 169
•
“Calibrating for Sensitivity” on page 173
9.8.1
Locating the Beam Index Point
The beam index point (BIP) is the point at which the sound leaves the wedge and
enters the material with maximum energy. The following procedure provides a
method to identify the BIP for your probe/wedge.
To locate the BIP
1.
Couple the probe to the test block at the 0 mark.
Calibration
165
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Figure 9-16 IIW block with probe at 0 mark
2.
Manipulate the probe until a high-amplitude signal appears on the screen after
the excitation pulse.
This is the reflection from the large arc of the block that is located on the Type I
block at 100 mm (4.00 in.).
3.
Move the probe forward and backward to bring the echo to its maximum
amplitude (peak).
4.
Ensure the echoes do not exceed 100 %. If necessary, reduce the gain.
The peak memory is an excellent tool for finding the BIP. Press PEAK MEM to turn
peak memory on. This feature draws and collects the echo envelope of the signal
while also drawing the live waveform (see Figure 9-17 on page 167). Match the live
waveform with the maximum point corresponding to the previously accumulated
echo dynamic curve. Press PEAK MEM again to turn peak memory off.
166
Chapter 9
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Figure 9-17 Using the Peak Memory feature to find the BIP
5.
9.8.2
Hold the probe stationary once the signal is peaked up and mark the side of the
transducer wedge directly over the 0 mark on the block.
This is the BIP, the point at which the sound leaves the wedge and enters the
material with maximum energy.
Verifying the Refracted Angle
The expected refracted angle of the probe should already have been entered in the
EPOCH 650 in the initial steps of the calibration procedure. Although the wedge may
be marked 45°, for example, the actual refracted angle could be slightly different due
to the properties of the test material or the amount of wear on the wedge. It is
necessary to verify the actual angle. This ensures that the EPOCH 650 sound path
calculations are accurate.
To verify the refracted angle
1.
Position the probe over the appropriate angle mark on the block (45° in this
example).
Calibration
167
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Figure 9-18 The IIW block with probe at the 45° mark
2.
Move the probe backward and forward to maximize the amplitude of the echo
coming from the large circular hole in the side of the block. The circular hole may
be filled with Plexiglas, but the procedure is the same.
Press PEAK MEM to use the Peak Memory feature to help find the peak of the
signal.
3.
Hold the probe stationary once the signal amplitude reaches a maximum and
then note the degree mark on the block that is aligned with the BIP, which was
marked on the side of the wedge in the procedure of “Locating the Beam Index
Point” on page 165.
This is the actual refracted angle (Beta) for this particular transducer and wedge
in steel.
4.
168
If this refracted angle value (Beta) differs from the value entered previously, select
Trig > Angle, and then enter the corrected angle.
Chapter 9
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Figure 9-19 Verifying the refracted angle
9.8.3
Calibrating for Distance
The ASTM E-164 IIW Type I block, which has a crescent cut in the side, produces
echoes at 100 mm (4 in.) and 225 mm (9 in.) on the screen, which are used for sound
path distance calibration. The following procedure uses the Olympus IIW Type I
carbon steel calibration block, part number TB7541-1. For information on distance
calibration with other standard calibration blocks, see “Common Angle Beam
Calibration Block Diagrams” on page 181.
If the EPOCH 650 is set to work in metric units, the calibration process is exactly
the same, except that the entries are in millimeters rather than inches.
To calibrate for sound path distance
Choose Basic > Range, and then set the value to 300 mm (12.00 in.).
This should ensure that the echoes from the block are visible on screen.
Calibration
169
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
1.
Select Auto Cal > Type = Soundpath.
2.
Couple the transducer to the calibration block so that the BIP is directly over the
0 mark on the ASTM test block. Do not move the transducer from this point
during the distance calibration step.
3.
Use the G1Start button (P5 key) to position gate 1 so that the first reflection from
the arc of the block is exceeding the gate threshold.
This reflection should be close to 100 mm (4 in.).
4.
Press dB, and then adjust the gain setting so that the echo amplitude is at
approximately 80 %.
The AUTO XX% can be used to automatically adjust the gain to set the gated echo
amplitude to XX% of full screen height (the default XX value is 80 %). To activate this
feature, press 2ND F, (AUTO XX%).
The sound path measurement reading appears in the Reading 2 box (see
Figure 9-20 on page 170).
Sound path
measurement
Figure 9-20 Example of a gated signal for zero calibration
170
Chapter 9
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
5.
Once a steady reading is achieved, choose Auto Cal > Cal-Zero.
The screen freezes and the Cal-Zero box appears.
Figure 9-21 Entering the Zero Cal thickness value
6.
Adjust the value to match the known thickness of the gated indication (4.000 in. in
this example), and then choose Continue to continue to the second calibration
step.
If for any reason you need to exit without acquiring calibration data, press
Cancel.
7.
Use the G1Start button (P5 key) to position gate 1 so that the second echo
reflection from the arc of the block is within the gated region. This reflection
should be close to 225 mm (9 in.) (see Figure 9-22 on page 172).
Calibration
171
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Figure 9-22 Example of a gated signal for velocity calibration
Another echo might be present on the screen at approximately the 200 mm (8 in.)
point. Disregard this echo as it is usually the result of beam spreading and sound
bouncing off the side of the block. Ensure that gate 1 is not over this echo.
8.
Press dB, and then adjust the gain so that the echo amplitude is at approximately
80 %.
The sound path measurement reading appears in the Reading 2 box.
9.
Once a steady reading is achieved, choose Auto Cal > Cal-Vel.
The screen freezes and the Enter Value for Velocity Cal box appears (see
Figure 9-23 on page 173).
172
Chapter 9
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Figure 9-23 Entering the Velocity Cal thickness value
10. Adjust the value to match the known thickness of the gated indication (9.000 in. in
this example), and then press Done to complete the calibration process.
9.8.4
Calibrating for Sensitivity
The final step in the angle beam calibration is to calibrate for sensitivity. This allows
you to set up a reference gain level for your inspection.
To calibrate for sensitivity
1.
Couple the probe to the IIW calibration block so that the transducer is aiming at
the 1.5 mm (0.060 in.) diameter side-drilled hole, used as a reference-reflector.
Calibration
173
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Side-drilled
hole used
for
sensitivity
calibration
Figure 9-24 The IIW block with probe facing sensitivity hole
2.
Move the probe backward and forward to maximize the amplitude of the echo
from the hole. Do not confuse the reference-reflector echo from the side of the
block.
Press PEAK MEM to use the Peak Memory feature to help find the peak of the
signal.
174
3.
Once the echo amplitude is maximized, adjust the system sensitivity (gain) to
bring the reference-reflector signal to a predetermined reference line on the
screen. In this example, the echo is brought to 80 % of full-screen height.
4.
Press 2ND F, (REF dB) to lock in the reference-gain level and add/subtract scanning
gain separately.
5.
Use the Add, Scan Db, +6 dB, −6 dB, and Off parameters to make scanning gain
adjustments once the reference gain (Ref) is active (see Figure 9-25 on page 175).
For more information on these functions, see “Setting Reference Gain and
Scanning Gain” on page 106.
Chapter 9
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Figure 9-25 Setting the reference gain
9.9
Calibrating to Known Depth Values with an Angle Beam
Transducer
The EPOCH 650 allows you to perform distance calibration with an angle beam
transducer based on the known depth of equal sized reflectors (usually side-drilled
holes) instead of known sound paths. The following sample angle beam calibration
details the procedure for the depth calibration.
As with any angle beam calibration, you must also verify the beam index point (BIP),
refracted angle, and perform a sensitivity calibration. It is of particular importance to
verify the refracted angle before performing a distance calibration. The acquired
depth measurement(s) used in this mode of calibration are based on calculations from
the sound path of the reflector (direct measurement) and the value of the manually
entered angle parameter. If the angle value is not correct, the distance calibration in
depth mode will not be accurate.
The following procedure describes only the depth distance calibration process for the
EPOCH 650. To verify the BIP and the refracted angle, and to calibrate for sensitivity,
see “Calibrating to Known Sound Path Values with an Angle Beam Transducer” on
page 165. The following sample angle beam calibration is performed using an
Calibration
175
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Olympus transducer part number A430S-SB with a frequency of 2.25 MHz and an
element size of 15.88 mm × 15.88 mm (0.625 in. × 0.625 in.). The transducer is mounted
on a 45° wedge, part number ABWS-6-45. An Olympus NAVSHIPS carbon-steel
calibration block, part number TB7567-1, is used.
Calibrating for Distance
The NAVSHIPS Block, which has six No. 3 side-drilled holes at various depths (see
Figure 9-35 on page 185), produces echoes at various depths on the screen in 6.35 mm
(0.25 in.) increments, which are used for depth distance calibration. This allows you to
calibrate for various inspections ranges up to 69.85 mm (2.75 in.). For this sample
calibration, the side-drilled holes at depth 12.5 mm and 38 mm (0.5 in. and 1.5 in.) are
used.
For information on distance calibration with other standard calibration blocks, see
“Common Angle Beam Calibration Block Diagrams” on page 181.
If the EPOCH 650 is set to work in metric units, the calibration process is exactly
the same, except that the entries are in millimeters rather than inches.
To calibrate for depth distance
1.
Choose Basic > Range, and then set the value to 100 mm (4 in.). This ensures that
the echoes from the block are visible on screen.
2.
Select Auto Cal > Type = Depth.
3.
Couple the transducer to the calibration block and move the probe backward and
forward to maximize the reflection from the side-drilled hole at depth 12.7 mm
(0.5 in.).
Press PEAK MEM to use the Peak Memory feature to help find the peak of the
signal.
176
Chapter 9
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
4.
Use the G1Start button (P5 key) to position gate 1 so that the reflection from the
first side-drilled hole is exceeding the gate threshold. This reflection should be
close to 12.5 mm (0.5 in.) (see Figure 9-26 on page 177).
Thickness measurement
Figure 9-26 Example of a gated signal for zero calibration
5.
Press dB, and then adjust the gain so that the echo amplitude is at approximately
80 %.
The AUTO XX% feature can be used to automatically adjust the gain to set the gated
echo amplitude to XX% of full screen height (the default XX value is 80 %). To activate
this feature, press 2ND F, (AUTO XX%).
A thickness measurement reading appears in large text above the A-scan.
6.
Once a steady reading is achieved, choose Auto Cal > Cal-Zero.
The screen freezes and the Cal-Zero box appears (see Figure 9-27 on page 178).
Calibration
177
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Figure 9-27 Entering the Zero Cal thickness value
7.
Adjust the value to match the known thickness of the gated indication (0.500 in. in
this example), and then choose Continue to continue to the second calibration
step (see Figure 9-28 on page 179).
If for any reason you need to exit without acquiring calibration data, press
Cancel.
178
Chapter 9
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Figure 9-28 Example of a gated signal for velocity calibration
8.
Press the G1Start button (P5 key) to position gate 1 so that the reflection from the
second side-drilled hole is within the gated region.
This reflection should be close to 38.1 mm (1.5 in.).
9.
Press dB and adjust the gain so that the echo amplitude is at approximately 80 %.
A thickness measurement reading appears in large text above the A-scan.
10. Once a steady reading is achieved, choose Auto Cal > Cal-Vel.
11. Adjust the value in the Cal-Vel dialog box to match the known thickness of the
gated indication (see Figure 9-29 on page 180).
Calibration
179
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Figure 9-29 Entering the Velocity Cal thickness value
12. Choose Done to complete the calibration process.
9.10 Curved Surface Correction
The EPOCH 650 ultrasonic flaw detector provides for surface distance correction
when inspecting pipes, cylinders, and other curved surfaces using an angle beam
transducer. This applies only to inspections where the surface of the test piece is
curved in the direction of the sound path of the transducer. This feature corrects the
horizontal distance and depth to reflector measurements based on part thickness and
part diameter. The correction is applicable for curved surface inspections where the
transducer is placed on the outer diameter of the part. Curved surface correction can
also be applied to solid cylinders (bars).
To activate curved surface correction
1.
180
Select Trig > CSC = Outer Dia or Bar to activate curved surface correction for
either tubular or solid cylinders.
The Curved Surface Correction icon (
) appears in the flag area.
Chapter 9
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
2.
Choose Trig > Diameter, and then enter the outer diameter of the inspection
piece.
3.
If using Trig > CSC = Outer Dia, choose Trig > Thick and then enter the wall
thickness of the inspection piece.
9.11
Common Angle Beam Calibration Block Diagrams
Figure 9-30 on page 181 to Figure 9-36 on page 186 illustrate calibration blocks
commonly used with angle beam probes.
NO LUCITE PLUG
.050 TYP. TOLERANCE
NON-CUMULATIVE
22.86 mm
(9 in.)
10.16 cm(4 in.)
Figure 9-30 The ASTM E164 IIW type calibration block (P/N: TB7541-1)
Calibration
181
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
0.060 HOLE
.906”
LUCITE
0.046 THRU
2” DIA.
LUCITE
PLUG
0.078 THRU
0.125 THRU
3/8 RAD
Figure 9-31 The IIW type 2 reference block (P/N: TB5939-1)
182
Chapter 9
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
4.000 REF
1.000 REF
1 in.2.54 cm.
R1.000 REF
17.78 cm(7 i
7.62 cm(3 in.)
n.)
(5 in.)12.7
cm.
2.500 REF
Ø.125 REF
R2.625 REF
45°0’ REF
R3.000 REF
.032 REF
Figure 9-32 The distance and sensitivity calibration (DSC) test block (P/N: TB75491)
Calibration
183
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
300 MM REF
NO LUCITE PLUG
225 mm
100 mm
100 MM REF
R100 MM REF
200 MM REF
25 MM REF
15.24 MM
REF
91 MM REF
Figure 9-33 The ASTM E164 IIW type metric calibration block (P/N: TB1054-2)
184
Chapter 9
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
25 MM REF
75 MM REF
30°0’ REF
R25 MM
REF
Ø5 MM THRU REF
R 50 MM REF
Figure 9-34 The ISO 7963 MAB calibration block (P/N: TB1065-1)
12.00 REF
1.25 REF
3.00 REF
Figure 9-35 The Navships cylindrical reflector block (P/N: TB7567-1)
Calibration
185
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
3.75 REF
.75 TYP
Figure 9-36 The 5-step precision thickness calibration block (P/N: 2214E)
186
Chapter 9
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
10. Data Logger
Olympus has designed the data logger for ease of use, with a wide range of features.
The data logger serves two basic purposes:
•
To manage test and setup data
•
To display certain data in a graphical format, as a screen snapshot, or as fullmotion video
The data logger includes the following capabilities:
•
Data is organized by alphanumeric filenames and identifier (ID) codes
•
A file description, inspector ID, and location note field exists in every file
•
Data capture to standard or advanced file types
•
Ability to edit files, rename files, clear file contents, and delete files
•
On-screen review of all file contents including snapshot and grid view
•
File summary screen (without images and setup info) for measurement review to
visually inspect and monitor the measurements saved in multiple IDs of the
active file
•
Video record and playback
•
Ability to transfer data between the EPOCH 650 and a computer.
•
Ability to export files, images, and data to removable memory.
Most of the capabilities of the data logger are included in three menu items:
•
File
Create different types of files, create memos within existing files, open files, view
file data in multiple formats and varying detail.
•
Manage
Edit certain file information, copy files, delete files, export and import files to and
from a microSD card, reset file data.
Data Logger
187
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
•
Video Record
Record the live screen to a file, review the recording, export and import video files
to a microSD card.
10.1 Data File Types
EPOCH 650 ultrasonic flaw detectors enable you to create several file types based on
application requirements. There are two standard file types, calibration and
incremental, and seven advanced file types.
NOTE
For detailed information on data file types, see “Data File Types” on page 309.
10.1.1
Calibration file type
A calibration (CAL) file is designed specifically for storing calibration setups.
Calibration files have space to store one single ID with its corresponding waveform
and data. Separate calibration files are created for the different transducers, materials,
or test parts being used. The advantage to storing setup data in calibration files is that
the data can be quickly recalled to the live screen using the Quick Recall parameter.
10.1.2
Incremental file type
Incremental (INC) files are designed for general inspection data storage, and can
contain more than one ID for storing file data. Each time the file is saved, the ID
increments. If an ID number cannot increment, an error beep sounds and the
momentary message “Cannot Increment ID” is shown on the display above the
parameter keys. Subsequent saves overwrite measurement readings if you do not
manually change the ID number first.
10.1.3
Advanced File Types
The EPOCH 650 features a full corrosion-style data logger with advanced file types.
These files have specific configurations of IDs, which are designed for use in many
corrosion applications.
188
Chapter 10
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
10.1.3.1
Sequential
A sequential (SEQ) file is defined by a starting and an ending ID number. The
resulting file includes the starting and ending points and all points in between.
10.1.3.2
Sequential with Custom Points
A sequential file with custom points (SEQ + CPT) is defined by a starting and ending
ID number plus a series of custom points. The resulting file includes the starting and
ending points and all points in between.
10.1.3.3
2-D Matrix Grid
A two dimensional (2D) file sequence begins with the ID number that refers to the
first column and the first row. Then the column (or row) increments one value at a
time until the sequence reaches the last column (or row) value while the other
dimension stays constant. At this point, the other dimension increases from its first to
its next value. This continues until the ID number that refers to the last column and
last row is reached.
10.1.3.4
2-D EPRI
The 2-D EPRI file (2DEPR) is the same as the standard 2-D grid file type except for a
minor change in the way alpha characters increment.
10.1.3.5
2-D Matrix Grid with Custom Point
A 2-D matrix grid with custom points (2D + CPT) file is the same as a standard 2-D
matrix grid file with the addition of custom points. Custom points allow multiple
readings per grid ID number to be assigned.
10.1.3.6
3-D Matrix Grid
A three-dimensional (3D) grid file sequence begins with the ID number that refers to
the first column, the first row, and the first point. Then the point (or column, or row)
increments one value at a time until the sequence reaches the last point (or column, or
row) value while the other two dimension values stay constant. Then, another
dimension increments from its first to its next value. This continues until the ID
number that refers to the last column, last row and last point is reached. You can select
either columns, rows, or points to increment first and one of the remaining two
selections to increment second.
Data Logger
189
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
10.1.3.7
Boiler
A boiler (BOILER) file is a special file type designed specifically for boiler
applications. A common method for identifying a thickness measurement location is
by a 3-D approach. The first dimension is Elevation, which refers to the physical
distance from the bottom to the top of the boiler. The second dimension is Tube
Number, which refers to the number of boiler tubes that need inspection. The third
dimension is the Custom Point, which refers to the actual thickness reading location at
the specified elevation on the specified tube. When these three dimensions are
combined, a single ID number is formed to precisely identify the exact location of
each thickness reading.
10.2 Data Logger Storage Capacity
The EPOCH 650 ultrasonic flaw detector data logger can store over 100000 IDs on
2 GB of available internal memory.
10.3 Saving Data to Files
The EPOCH 650 allows you to save data whenever there is an active file open with an
active ID. If there is no active ID and you try to save, the instrument displays the error
message “No active ID” at the top of the display. For more information, see “Open”
on page 197.
There is no Save button in the File menu because data is usually captured and saved
from the live screen.
To save data to an active file
 Press 2ND F, (SAVE) on the adjustment knob configuration or SAVE on the keypad
configuration to save data.
The following information is saved:
190
•
File name
•
ID code
•
Alarm conditions
•
Gate measurement modes
•
Sound path leg for each gate
Chapter 10
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
•
Up to five measurement reading box values (all active user-selected
measurements on the instrument screen).
•
A-scan waveform
•
Peak memory envelope or peak hold waveform, if active
•
Complete setup parameters
•
Flag status (FREEZE, zoom, PEAK MEM, etc.)
•
Active software features: DAC/TCG, DGS/AVG, AWS D1.1/D1.5
•
Software feature/option setups
10.4 Data Logger Menus
The data logger is divided into three main menu items: File, Manage, and Video
Record.
10.4.1
File Menu
Following are the parameters in the File menu (see Figure 10-1 on page 192):
•
Open
•
Create
•
Quick Recall
•
Memo
•
Last ID
•
Select ID
Data Logger
191
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Figure 10-1 The File menu parameters
10.4.1.1
Create
Although the Create parameter is the second item in the File menu, you must first
create a file before you can save file data (the EPOCH 650 does create a default file:
NONAME00). Files can be created on the instrument, or in the GageView Pro
software and transferred to the instrument.
Each time you save file data, it is linked to a file identifier (ID). The number of IDs in a
file depends on the file type selected and the number of data sets the you have saved.
On the main screen of the EPOCH 650, the currently open file ID is displayed at the
top left corner.
To create CAL or INC files
1.
192
Choose File > Create (P2 key) to open the Create setup page (see Figure 10-2 on
page 193).
Chapter 10
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
NOTE
Required fields in the Create setup page are marked with an asterisk (*).
Figure 10-2 The Create setup page
2.
In the Create setup page, use the arrow keys or adjustment knob to select the file
type (INC or CAL).
3.
Press NEXT to highlight the Filename field.
4.
Press Edit (P1 key) and then enter a file name (up to 32 characters long) using the
virtual keyboard and the F1–F5 keys (see Figure 10-3 on page 194).
Data Logger
193
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Figure 10-3 File name edit
Special characters such as spaces, decimals, slashes, and punctuation are not
permitted in the Filename field.
5.
For each of the next three optional fields (Description, Inspector ID, Location
Note) press NEXT, then Edit (P1 key) to enter information.
6.
If the File Type is INC:
a)
Press NEXT, then Edit (P1 key) to enter an optional ID Prefix.
This prefix will save as part of the ID but will not increment.
b)
194
Enter a Start ID for the INC file.
7.
If the File Type is CAL, press NEXT, then Edit (P1 key) to enter a calibration ID.
8.
Once you have completed the file setup, press NEXT to highlight the Create
button.
9.
Press Create (P1 key) to exit the setup page and create the file.
Chapter 10
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
You can also choose &Open (P2 key) to create and open the file in a single step, or
&Save (P3 key) to create, open, and save the current settings to the current file in
a single step.
Once a file is created, you must open the file before trying to save information. This is
a separate function from Create. See “Selecting a File as the Active Storage Location.”
on page 197 for instructions on how to open a file.
To create Advanced files
1.
Choose File > Create (group 5/5) to open the Create setup page (see Figure 10-4
on page 195).
2.
Press Advanced (P3 key) to select the Advanced file type.
3.
Press NEXT to highlight the Filename field and enter a file name.
4.
Enter optional information in the Description, Inspector ID, and Location Note
fields.
Figure 10-4 Creating advanced file type
Data Logger
195
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
5.
Press NEXT to highlight the Setup field.
6.
Press Ok (P1 key).
7.
In Create page two, press a parameter key (P1–P7) to select a type (see Figure 10-5
on page 196):
•
SEQ
•
SEQ+CP
•
2D
•
2DEPR
•
2D+CP
•
3D
•
BOILER
8.
Enter the required (and optional if desired) information for the selected type.
9.
Press NEXT to highlight the Create button.
Figure 10-5 Advanced (Create page two)
10. Press Create (P1 key) to exit the setup page and create the file.
196
Chapter 10
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
You can also choose &Open (P2 key) to create and open the file in a single step, or
&Save (P3 key) to create and open the file, then save the current settings to the file
in a single step.
10.4.1.2
Open
The Open parameter performs multiple actions for saved files in the data logger. The
Open parameter is used to:
•
Select a file as the active storage location
•
View details about a specific file
•
View setup and waveform data for saved IDs in a file
•
Recall a file ID to bring saved data to the live screen
•
View a summary of all saved data in a file
•
Export file data to a microSD card
Each of these actions is described in detail below.
Selecting a File as the Active Storage Location.
The EPOCH 650 maintains a list of all files that have been created or downloaded to
the instrument. To save information to a file, you must first open that file to select it as
the active storage location.
The Open parameter allows you to use calibration files and inspection storage files at
the same time within a procedure while minimizing required button presses. For
example, a particular inspection may require the use of three separate transducers
and therefore three calibrations, but you may wish to store all inspection data in one
inspection file. In this situation, open that inspection file first.
To open a file and set it to the active storage location
1.
Choose File > Open (see Figure 10-6 on page 198).
2.
Use the knob or arrow keys to select the specific file that you want to open.
Data Logger
197
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Figure 10-6 The Open page
3.
Press Open (P2 key) to open the selected file and return to the live screen.
The ID of the opened file is displayed at the top of the screen (see Figure 10-7 on
page 198).
When you press 2ND F, (SAVE) from the live screen, on-screen data and settings are
saved to the currently open ID.
Figure 10-7 ID of open file in the live screen
Viewing file setup information
You can view the file setup and creation information.
To view the setup information
198
1.
Choose File > Open (group 5/5), and then select the file that you want to view.
2.
Press Details (P1 key) to enter the Details page (see Figure 10-8 on page 199).
Chapter 10
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Figure 10-8 The Details page
3.
Press Done (P1 key) to return to the Open page or press
to return to the main
screen.
Viewing Setup and Waveform Data for Saved IDs in a File
Once data has been saved into a file, you are able to view contents of the saved data.
The waveform and basic setup parameters are stored on one screen, and the complete
setup information on another screen.
To view saved data
1.
2.
Choose File > Open, and then select the specific file that you want to view.
Press Contents (P3 key) to view the saved waveform and the basic setup data.
The ID of the file being viewed is displayed at the top left corner of the screen (see
Figure 10-9 on page 200).
Data Logger
199
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Figure 10-9 Viewing file content (waveform)
3.
200
Press Setup to view the complete setup parameters for the current ID (see
Figure 10-10 on page 201).
Chapter 10
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Figure 10-10 Viewing file content (setup)
4.
To switch to a different ID, use the knob or arrow keys to scroll through the saved
IDs in the file.
5.
Press
to return to the File > Open menu.
To choose from a large number of IDs
1.
Choose File > Open.
2.
Use the knob or arrow keys to select the specific file that you want to view.
3.
Press Contents (P3 key).
4.
Press Select ID (P2 key).
5.
Use the Prev Page, Next Page, or arrow keys (|<< or >>| to quickly access any ID in
the list.
6.
When you have selected the ID you want to view, press Select (P1 key).
7.
Press
twice to return to the File > Open menu.
Data Logger
201
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Recalling a File ID
To bring saved data to the live screen, you must recall that particular file ID. For
incremental (INC) files, you must select the specific ID to be recalled. For calibration
(CAL) files, recalling the file automatically recalls the parameters in the single ID
saved in that file.
To recall a file ID
1.
Choose File > Open, and then select the specific file that you want to view.
2.
Press Contents (P3 key) to view the saved waveform and basic setup data.
The ID being viewed shows up at the top of the screen.
3.
Press Select ID (P2 key) to display the Select ID page (see Figure 10-11 on
page 202).
4.
Use the arrow keys or adjustment knob to select the ID you want to recall.
5.
Press Select.
6.
Choose Recall to recall the selected ID and bring the parameters to the live screen.
The notification “New setup recalled. Press any key to continue” displays at the
bottom of the screen.
7.
Press any key on the instrument.
Figure 10-11 Select ID page
202
Chapter 10
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Viewing a Summary of all Saved Data
After you have completed saving data to a file, you may want to view a summary of
the different measurements saved in the different IDs within the file. (The
measurement parameters displayed are selected from Meas Setup > Reading Setup
[group 3/5].)
To view a summary of all saved data in a file
1.
Choose File > Open (group 5/5), and select the file you want to view.
2.
Press Summary (P3 key) to view a measurement summary for all the saved IDs in
the selected file (see Figure 10-12 on page 203).
3.
Press Done (P1 key) to return to the previous screen.
Figure 10-12 File measurement summary
To record and export thickness data
1.
Make a thickness measurement and check that the expected reading is displayed
in the Reading 5 box.
2.
Press Thick Record (P3 key).
A .csv file is written to the microSD card.
Data Logger
203
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
10.4.1.3
Quick Recall
Quickly recalls a saved setup from a calibration file.
Only files created using the CAL file type are displayed in the quick recall setup
window.
To quickly recall a file using the recall setup
1.
Select File > Quick Recall. (group 5/5)
The Recall setup menu appears (see Figure 9-11 on page 159).
Figure 10-13 The Recall setup menu
204
2.
Use the arrow keys or the adjustment knob to select a calibration file.
3.
Press Recall (P1 key) to recall the selected file settings as the live instrument
parameters.
Chapter 10
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
4.
10.4.1.4
Press
to return to the live screen.
Memo
The Memo parameter allows you to enter descriptive comments to include with
stored data. Memos can be used to provide further details about a measurement
condition or calibration. Memos can only be entered from the live screen. To add a
memo to a particular data file, open that file before creating the memo. To place a
memo in the database with a particular reading, enter it before saving the reading. To
place a memo in the database after saving an ID, enter it afterwards.
To add a memo
1.
Choose File > Memo (group 5/5)
2.
Press Edit (P1 key) and use the on screen keypad to add information (see
Figure 10-14 on page 205).
Figure 10-14 Memo setup page
3.
For faster memo creation, press Dictionary (P2 key).
Data Logger
205
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
4.
In the Dictionary page, use NEXT to select one of the Custom labels (see
Figure 10-15 on page 206).
Figure 10-15 Memo Dictionary page
5.
206
Press INS (P2 key) to insert the custom label into the memo and return to Memo
setup page one (see Figure 10-15 on page 206).
6.
Press Edit to add more information to the selected field.
7.
Use the Up (P4 key) and Down (P2 key) arrows to move through the menu fields.
8.
Press Save to return to the active screen when you are finished creating your
memo.
Chapter 10
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Figure 10-16 Populated Memo setup page
To erase all the editable text in the Memo setup page
 Press Clear.
10.4.1.5
Last ID and Select ID
When a file is opened, it defaults to the first open ID (displayed in the ID field at the
top of the screen).
To select the last ID in the file
 Choose File > Last ID.
To select from a list of all the available IDs
 Choose File > Select ID elect from a list of all the available IDs in the currently
open file (see Figure 10-17 on page 208).
Data Logger
207
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Figure 10-17 The Select ID menu
10.4.2
Manage Menu
This section presents the Manage menu (see Figure 10-18 on page 209).
208
Chapter 10
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Figure 10-18 The Manage menu parameters
The parameters are as follows:
•
Reset
•
Export
•
Import
•
Edit
•
Copy
•
Delete
•
Import Memo
10.4.2.1
Reset
The EPOCH 650 ultrasonic flaw detector allows you to reset its current settings to
default values when necessary. See “Resetting the Instrument” on page 70 for details
on resetting the instrument.
Data Logger
209
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
10.4.2.2
Export
The Export parameter exports file data to the external microSD Card. Many customers
use the data saved from their instruments in flaw detection reports of their findings.
Rather than require manual copying of the measurements to the reports, the
EPOCH 650 has the capability to export saved file data to a microSD card.
Data can be saved as in the following formats:
•
.csv – can be opened in programs such as Microsoft Excel.
•
.svy – a binary format that can only be used on or between EPOCH models.
•
.xml – a format that is useful for using in web applications.
•
.bmp – an image format that can be opened in any image viewing software.
To export file data to the microSD card
1.
Choose the Manage menu item.
1.
Press Export, (P2 key) to display the Export setup page (see Figure 10-19 on
page 211).
2.
Use the arrow keys or adjustment knob to select the file that you want to export.
3.
Press NEXT to highlight the File Type box.
4.
Press CSV (P1 key), Binary (P2 key), XML (P3 key), Memo (P4 key), or Report (P5
key) to select a file type.
The Memo file type is saved as an XML file in the MEMO folder on the microSD
card.
210
5.
Press NEXT to highlight the Export button.
6.
Press Ok (P1 key) to export the file data to the microSD card.
Chapter 10
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Figure 10-19 Export setup page
10.4.2.3
Import
The Import parameter imports .svy file data from the external microSD Card.
To import file data from the microSD card
1.
Choose Import, (P3 key) to display the Import page (see Figure 10-20 on
page 212).
2.
Use the arrow keys or adjustment knob to select the file that you want to import.
3.
Press NEXT to highlight the Import button.
4.
Press Ok (P1 key) to import the file data from the microSD card.
Data Logger
211
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Figure 10-20 Import page
To import memo data from the microSD card
212
1.
Press Import Memo, (P7 key) to display the Import page (see Figure 10-21 on
page 213).
2.
Use the arrow keys or adjustment knob to select the file that you want to import.
3.
Press Import (P1 key) to import the memo data from the microSD card.
Chapter 10
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Figure 10-21 Import (memo) page
10.4.2.4
Edit
The Edit parameter is used to edit file names and descriptions once a file has been
saved.
To edit file creation parameters
1.
Choose Manage > Edit (group 5/5) to display the edit page (see Figure 10-22 on
page 214).
Data Logger
213
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Figure 10-22 The Edit setup menu
2.
Select a file from the available list.
The CAL, INC, and SEQ file types are listed.
3.
Press NEXT to highlight the field you want to edit.
4.
Press Edit (P1 key) to add or change information in the field.
5.
Press NEXT to select Apply.
6.
Press Ok to confirm the changes.
7.
Press
10.4.2.5
to return to the main screen.
Copy
Copy is used to make a duplicate copy of a file saved on the instrument.
To copy a file
1.
214
Choose Manage > Copy (group 5/5) to display the Copy page (see Figure 10-23 on
page 215).
Chapter 10
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Figure 10-23 The Copy setup menu
2.
Select a file from the list.
The CAL, INC, and SEQ file types are listed.
3.
In the Filename field, enter name to give to the copied file. (The same rules
mentioned previously for file names apply to this field.)
4.
Select Copy and press Ok to confirm the changes. Press
to return to the main
screen.
10.4.2.6
Delete
The Delete function is used to delete a saved file from the instrument. This function
deletes the file name as well as all the saved data and IDs contained within it.
To delete a file
1.
Choose Manage > Delete.
The Delete page appears (see Figure 10-24 on page 216).
Data Logger
215
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Figure 10-24 The Delete setup menu
2.
Select from the list the file you want to delete.
3.
Press Details (P1 key) to view the details of a file before you continue.
4.
Press Clear (P3 key) to clear the contents of a file.
5.
Press Delete (P6 key) to erase the selected file from the instrument.
10.4.2.7
Import Memo
Imports the memo fields from a file on a microSD card to the active open file.
To import a memo
216
1.
Choose Manage > Import Memo to open the Import page.
2.
Select a file using the arrow keys or adjustment knob and press Import (P1 key).
Chapter 10
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
10.5 Grid View
Grid View is a feature of the EPOCH 650 ultrasonic flaw detector data logger. With
Grid View, you can observe the measurements saved in multiple IDs of the active file
displayed on the live screen. This feature can be used for any file or file type, but it is
most often used when conducting a thickness survey using a predefined inspection
pattern. When used in a thickness survey, the grid view provides a partial or full
screen grid of thickness measurements arranged by columns and rows. When you
save data to an ID in the file, the saved thickness reading appears in the
corresponding cell in the grid. This grid can be color coded to provide fast visibility of
an area of critical thinning.
10.5.1
Activating Grid View
Grid View must be activated before it is visible on the screen.
To activate Grid View
1.
Navigate to the Display Setup group menu (3/5).
2.
Press Grid Setup (P2 key) to enter the Grid setup page.
3.
Press On (P2 key) to turn Grid Enable on.
10.5.2
Configuring the Grid View
You use the Grid setup page to configure the grid display options.
•
Grid Size
Controls the amount of the live screen dedicated to displaying the grid. Half Size
splits the live display area. The top half displays the live A-scan. The bottom half
displays the grid. Full Size uses the entire active screen area to display the grid
(no A-scan is visible).
•
Display Color
Controls the cell color coding of the live grid. Mono always applies the same text
and background color to all cells in the grid.
Color applies either red, yellow or green text or background to each cell
dependent on the value of the measurement.
— Low Range Thickness
All measurements below this value are colored red.
Data Logger
217
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
— High Range Thickness
All measurements above this value are colored green.
All measurements between the Low Range Thickness value and the High Range
Thickness value are colored yellow.
To configure the grid size and color
1.
In the Grid setup page, press NEXT to highlight the Grid Size field.
2.
Select Half Size (P1 key) or Full Size (P2 key).
3.
Press Next to move to the Display Color field.
4.
Select Mono (P1 key) or Color (P2 key).
If you select Color, the Low Range Thickness and High Range Thickness fields
appear.
 Enter a value into each field.
5.
Press
10.5.3
to return to the live screen and display the grid.
Using the Grid
Since Grid View displays the data contained in a file, there are two ways you can view
this data:
•
Adding data to a file from the live screen while making measurements
•
Reviewing saved data in a file.
To use a grid in the live screen
1.
Choose File > Open and open the file you want to use.
2.
Navigate to the Display Setup group menu (3/5).
3.
Press Grid (P3 key) to display the Grid controls (see Figure 10-25 on page 219).
The grid controls include the arrow buttons (see “To use the arrow buttons” on
page 220), Grid button, and Save button.
4.
To immediately begin populating the grid with data, make a measurement and
press Save (P7 key).
•
218
In an incremental file, the file ID is incremented, the data is saved to that
location, and a new row in the grid is created and displayed to show the
newly saved data.
Chapter 10
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
•
In an advanced file type, the data is saved to the current location if the ID is
empty. If the ID is populated, a pop up asks if you want to overwrite the ID. If
you press No (P2 key) the next ID is selected.
Figure 10-25 Grid controls in the live screen
To overwrite data in a live screen
1.
Use the Up and Down arrow buttons to navigate to the cell to overwrite (see “To
use the arrow buttons” on page 220).
2.
Make a measurement
3.
Press Save (P7 key).
A dialog box pops up asking if you want to overwrite the ID.
4.
Select Yes (P1 key) to overwrite the data.
To use a grid when viewing a saved file
1.
Choose File > Open (group 5/5).
2.
Select a file from the list and press Contents (P3 key).
3.
Use the arrow buttons to navigate through the grid (see “To use the arrow
buttons” on page 220).
Data Logger
219
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
4.
Use Select ID (P2 key) to select and highlight a specific ID for viewing (see
Figure 10-26 on page 220).
Figure 10-26 Grid controls in Contents screen
To use the arrow buttons
1.
Use the Left arrow button (P1 key) to move the focus to the left of the highlighted
cell and change the active file ID to the new highlighted cell.
2.
Use the Right arrow button (P2 key) to move the focus to the right of the
highlighted cell and change the active file ID to the new highlighted cell.
3.
Use the Up arrow button (P3 key) to move the focus to the cell above the
highlighted cell and change the active file ID to the new highlighted cell.
4.
Use the Down arrow button (P4 key) to move the focus to the cell below the
highlighted cell and change the active file ID to the new highlighted cell.
NOTE
The selected cell is highlighted with a black background.
220
Chapter 10
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
10.6 Screen Capture
The EPOCH 650 allows you to quickly capture on-screen information like the Print
Screen command on a PC. The captured screen image is saved to the microSD card
(included with the instrument) as a bitmap (.bmp) file type.
To capture and save a screen image
1.
Insert a microSD card.
2.
Set up the EPOCH 650 to display the information that you want to capture.
3.
Press 2ND F, F1 to capture the image.
The screen freezes for a few seconds, then the unit beeps when the save is
complete.
4.
Remove the microSD card and insert it into a PC card reader (adaptors for this
purpose are included with the instrument). The saved screen shots are titled
“BMP0.bmp, BMP1.bmp, BMP2.bmp,” etc., as each screen shot is saved.
10.7 Video Record
The video recorder allows you to record, save, delete, and play back live screen video.
You can also view the video on a PC or export video to or import from other
EPOCH 650 ultrasonic flaw detectors.
10.7.1
Activating the video recorder
Before activating the video recorder, set up the EPOCH 650 to display the events you
want to record.
To activate the video recorder
1.
Choose Video Record > Setup (group 5/5).
2.
Press On (P2 key) to activate and display the video recorder controls.
10.7.2
Using the video recorder
Using the video recorder includes the activities associated with recording and
managing video files.
Data Logger
221
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
To record video
1.
Press Record (P1 key).
2.
Press Pause (P2 key) to pause recording and return to the previous screen.
3.
Press Flag (P3 key) to mark individual frames for fast review during playback.
NOTE
While recording a live video, Gate and Gain adjustment are available. No other
parameters can be adjusted during live recording.
To save a recording
1.
Press Save (P5 key) to display the Create (file) page.
2.
Press Edit (P1 key) to enter a Filename.
3.
Press NEXT to enter information in the optional fields.
4.
Press NEXT to highlight the Create button, then press Ok (P1 key).
To clear video from memory
 Press Clear (P4 key) to clear the current video recording from internal memory.
The Record counter (above the P2 key) is reset to zero (0).
To review a recording
1.
Choose Video Record > Video Files.
2.
Use the adjustment knob or arrow keys to select a file.
3.
Press Review (P1 key) to playback the video in the file.
4.
Press Pause to pause.
5.
Press Restart to go back to the beginning.
6.
Press
twice to return to the live screen and video recorder controls.
To export a recording
222
1.
Choose Video Record > Video Files.
2.
Use the adjustment knob or arrow keys to select a file.
3.
Press Export (P2 key) to export the file to the microSD card.
Chapter 10
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
4.
Press
to return to the live screen and video recorder controls.
To import a recording
1.
Choose Video Record > Video Files.
2.
Use the adjustment knob or arrow keys to select a file.
3.
Press Import (P3 key) to import the file from the microSD card.
4.
Press
to return to the live screen and video recorder controls.
To delete a recording
1.
Choose Video Record > Video Files.
2.
Use the adjustment knob or arrow keys to select a file.
3.
Press Delete (P4 key) to delete the file.
4.
Press
to return to the live screen and video recorder controls.
Data Logger
223
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
224
Chapter 10
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
11. Software Features and Options
This chapter discusses the activation and operation of software features and options
for the EPOCH 650 ultrasonic flaw detector.
11.1
Defining Licensed and Unlicensed Software Features
The EPOCH 650 ultrasonic flaw detector comes standard with many software features
that expand the instrument’s capabilities beyond standard flaw detection.
The following software features are standard components of the EPOCH 650:
•
Dynamic DAC/TCG
•
DGS/AVG
•
AWS D1.1/D1.5
The EPOCH 650 also has several software options available. These options are not
standard inclusions of the base instrument, and must be purchased and added to the
unit. These options (Template Storage, API 5UE, Waveform Averaging, Interface Gate,
Corrosion Module, and BEA), can be activated at the time of purchase of the
instrument, or can be activated remotely after purchase of the instrument.
If a software option is not activated, you do not have access to the submenu that
controls this function. Olympus can provide an activation code that is entered in the
instrument and allows access to the option. This allows the software to be activated
without having to return the instrument to a service center.
To activate a software option
1.
Choose Inst Setup (group 3/5).
2.
Press Software Options (P4 key) to open the Software Options setup page (see
Figure 11-1 on page 226).
Software Features and Options
225
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Software serial
number
Enter Option Key
here
Figure 11-1 The Option key entry dialog box
3.
Note the 16-character software serial number for your instrument that appears in
the S/N parameter.
4.
Contact Olympus to purchase the software option, providing the software serial
number.
5.
Once Olympus provides the remote activation code, open the Software Options
setup page (Inst Setup > Software Options).
6.
Press Edit (P1 key) to activate the virtual keypad.
7.
Enter the activation code in the Enter Option Key field (see Figure 11-1 on
page 226).
8.
Press NEXT to select Activate.
9.
Press Ok (P1 key) to activate the option and return to the live screen.
11.2
Dynamic DAC/TCG
A distance amplitude correction (DAC) curve is used to plot amplitude variations of
signals from reflectors of the same size, but at different distances from the transducer.
Normally, these reflectors produce echoes of varying amplitude due to material
226
Chapter 11
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
attenuation and beam spread as the sound beam travels through the part. The
purpose of the DAC curve is to graphically compensate for material attenuation, near
field effects, beam spread, and surface roughness.
After plotting a DAC curve, reflectors of the same size as those used for creation of the
curve produce echoes that peak along the curve despite different locations within the
test piece. Similarly, reflectors that are smaller than those used to create the curve fall
below the level, while larger reflectors exceed the curve level.
When a DAC curve is created in the EPOCH 650 ultrasonic flaw detector, the
instrument also creates a time-corrected gain (TCG) setup. TCG is used to compensate
for the same factors as DAC, but the presentation is different. Instead of drawing a
curve across the display that follows the reference-reflector peaks downward as
sound is attenuated, the TCG setup amplifies the gain as a function of time (distance)
to bring the reference-reflectors to the same screen height (80 % FSH).
The EPOCH 650 DAC/TCG feature allows you to quickly and easily toggle between
DAC and TCG views, giving freedom to use both techniques during a single
inspection. When you switch from DAC to TCG view, the DAC curves are displayed
as TCG lines across the screen. The time-varied gain effectively amplifies the signals
across the time base to make the DAC curves appear as straight lines across the
screen.
You can customize DAC/TCG setups to your unique application requirements using
the DAC/TCG software feature for the EPOCH 650. The DAC/TCG feature
incorporates several DAC/TCG modes that adhere to ASME, ASME III, and JIS sizing
codes. The software offers direct control of gain, range, zero offset, and delay, as well
as scanning gain and transfer correction. In addition, the DAC/TCG option provides
DAC warning curves that can be customized.
In the live A-scan mode, the DAC/TCG menu contains the various setup and
adjustment parameters. These parameters provide access to several important
functions that control DAC/TCG setup and operation.
In the following sections, all DAC/TCG modes are covered. The DAC/TCG setup
procedure is the same for all modes. The setup is covered in detail in the
ASME/ASME-III section to follow. Any differences in the procedure to set up other
DAC/TCG modes are discussed in the pertinent section for that particular mode.
11.2.1
Feature Activation and Reference Correct
Before any options associated with DAC/TCG are activated, the EPOCH 650 must be
properly calibrated to the material being inspected.
Software Features and Options
227
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
To activate the DAC/TCG feature
1.
Choose DAC/TCG (group 4/5).
2.
Press Setup (P7 key) to display the DAC/TCG setup page (see Figure 11-2 on
page 228).
3.
Press one of the parameter keys (P2 –P6) to select a DAC/TCG Mode.
You can also apply the Ref Correct (reference correction) option to the digital
analysis of the live A-scan and DAC/TCG mode. The reference correction feature,
when activated, allows full gain manipulation of either the live echo peaks or the
DAC curve while providing the % amplitude or dB comparison of the actual
peak-to-curve ratio. In this way, you can use scanning gain while maintaining an
accurate measurement reading of the ratio of the gated peak to the DAC curve for
sizing purposes. The gated echo amplitude is corrected back to the reference gain
level for amplitude evaluation compared to the DAC curve.
4.
If applicable, set Ref Correct to On.
5.
Select an optional Curve Type (Standard, ASME-3, JIS, and CUSTOM modes),
and No of Curves. (Select to allow or deactivate a 20–80% DAC view.)
6.
Press
to return to the live A-scan screen and begin DAC/TCG setup.
Figure 11-2 The DAC/TCG setup page
228
Chapter 11
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
To deactivate the DAC/TCG feature
1.
Choose DAC/TCG > Setup.
2.
Select Off (P1 key).
11.2.2
Standard/ASME III DAC/TCG
The Standard DAC mode is a single DAC curve drawn from peak-to-peak on
reference-reflectors. The ASME III (or ASME-3) mode draws three DAC curves: one
main curve from peak-to-peak on the reference-reflectors and two warning curves at
−6 dB and −14 dB compared to the main curve.
To set up ASME-3 DAC mode
1.
Choose either Standard or ASME-3 on the DAC/TCG setup page.
2.
Press
3.
Set the range so the first reflector of the DAC curve is toward the left side of the
screen (see Figure 11-3 on page 229).
to return to the live A-scan screen.
Figure 11-3 First DAC setup step
Software Features and Options
229
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
To build a DAC curve
1.
Move the probe to the first echo.
2.
Press G1 Start (P5 key) and center gate 1 over the echo.
3.
Press Add (P1 key).
4.
Press 2ND F, (AUTO XX%) to activate AUTO 80 % for the indication.
You can press Delete (P2 key) to delete a point that is incorrectly acquired.
5.
Move the probe to the next echo and center gate 1 over the echo.
You can adjust the RANGE and DELAY while detecting the echo. You can also go
to the Trig menu item and adjust the Angle, Thick, and CSC parameters.
Once a point is captured, the peak amplitude of that point is marked using a “x”
symbol. Figure 11-4 on page 230 shows a partially completed DAC curve.
Figure 11-4 DAC Setup one point
230
6.
Press 2ND F, (AUTO XX%).
7.
Repeat capturing until a curve is built (See Figure 11-5 on page 231.)
8.
Press Done (P3 key).
Chapter 11
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Figure 11-5 Partial DAC curve with each echo set to 80 % FSH
In the example above (Figure 11-5 on page 231), the instrument has drawn a DAC
curve with three levels from the first point to the second. You have used the AUTO
80 % function to bring the second point to 80 % full-screen height. This assures that
the point is captured accurately because amplitude resolution is better at greater echo
heights. This also pushes the first captured echo over 110 % FSH so the main DAC
curve and the −6 dB warning curve extend downward to the second point from offscreen.
While acquiring DAC points, you have three other choices besides Add:
•
Delete
Deletes the most recently captured DAC point.
•
Erase
Deletes all captured DAC points (the entire curve).
•
Done
Completes curve acquisition and switches to inspection mode.
Software Features and Options
231
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
If you need to continue capturing points, you can increase the instrument range or
increase the display delay to view echoes further out in time.
Once the correct number of points have been captured, choose DAC/TCG > Done to
complete the DAC curve and switch to the DAC inspection mode.
Figure 11-6 The completed DAC curve
Once the DAC curve is complete and the instrument is in inspection mode, the
instrument provides a new set of parameters:
•
DAC Gain
This adjustment allows you to manipulate the screen height/gain of both the
DAC/TCG curve as well as the echoes on screen. This allows for amplitude-tocurve comparison at code compliant screen levels across the time base.
•
View
This parameter allows you to toggle between the DAC curve acquired and the
corresponding TCG setup based on the DAC curve information.
232
Chapter 11
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
•
Next DAC
This parameter cycles through the available DAC curves (if more than one is
available) for amplitude comparison with on-screen echoes.
•
Gain Step
This parameter controls the steps by which Curve Gain is adjusted. Possible steps
are 0.1, 1.0, 2.0, 3.0, 6.0, 12.0 dB.
•
G1Start
The start position of Gate 1 is also adjustable through the DAC menu as well as by
pressing the GATES key.
•
Edit
This parameter allows you to return to DAC acquisition mode, providing access
to the Add, Delete, Erase, and Done functions. (Edit is not available in TCG view.)
Figure 11-7 Completed DAC curves in TCG view mode
While DAC/TCG is active, you have full control of the Range, Delay, and Zoom
settings. With this you can focus on areas of interest within the DAC setup.
Figure 11-8 on page 234 shows a reduced range with delay.
Software Features and Options
233
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Figure 11-8 A small range DAC
11.2.3
Gain Adjustment Options
The EPOCH 650 ultrasonic flaw detector DAC/TCG software features three separate
types of gain adjustment for each DAC/TCG setup. These gain adjustments allow for
better inspection precision, easy manipulation of curves and live peak information,
and transfer correction.
11.2.3.1
Scanning Gain
In order to quickly find and identify potential defects, it is commonly required by
code to increase the gain (scanning gain) on the EPOCH 650 from the reference
(calibration) gain for scanning purposes. However, once a potential defect is
identified, this gain is usually removed to view the reflector at Ref gain level, set at
calibration. The DAC/TCG software is fully capable of adding temporary scanning
gain for inspection purposes. This scanning gain only affects the live A-scan and does
not adjust the level of the DAC curve(s) set up on screen.
To add temporary scanning gain
1.
234
Press dB.
Chapter 11
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
2.
Adjust the gain in either coarse or fine increments, or use the +6 dB and –6 dB
keys (P4 and P5 keys) to increase or decrease scanning gain.
3.
Press dB to access the Gain menu.
4.
Press Scan dB (P2 key) to toggle between the base (reference) gain and the
adjusted scanning gain.
5.
Choose dB > Off to turn scanning gain off completely.
Figure 11-9 on page 235 shows a Standard DAC setup with 3 dB of scanning gain
added.
Figure 11-9 Standard DAC with 3 dB scanning gain
When reference correction is active, the digital comparison between a captured
reflector and the DAC curve is accurate even with the scanning gain applied to the
inspection provided that the gated echo is not saturated. Figure 11-10 on page 236
shows the same setup as above but with Reference Correction active. Notice that the
scanning gain has been removed from the dB-to-curve measurement in location 5. The
instrument compares the echo height to the DAC curve, compensates for the added
scanning gain, and reports the true-amplitude comparison.
Software Features and Options
235
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Figure 11-10 DAC with 3 dB scan gain - reference correction active
11.2.3.2
Curve Adjustment Gain (DAC Gain or TCG Gain)
The overall gain level of the entire DAC curve and TCG line setup can be adjusted
higher or lower from the Reference Gain. Most inspection codes do not permit
reflectors to be sized below 20 % FSH. Therefore, to inspect beyond a certain
depth/sound path time within a part, it is necessary to raise the gain of both the live
A-scan and the DAC curve to continue the inspection. This is accomplished on the
EPOCH 650 using the curve gain (DAC curve adjustment gain).
To adjust the curve gain
1.
Choose DAC/TCG > Gain Step, and then use the Up and Down arrow keys or the
adjustment knob to choose the desired increment of the gain adjustment.
2.
Press DAC Gain (P1 key), and then adjust the curve gain by the selected
increment either positive or negative.
Figure 11-11 on page 237 shows a DAC setup with DAC gain in use to provide
accurate echo amplitude measurement by placing the echo close to 80 % FSH.
236
Chapter 11
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Figure 11-11 DAC curves with adjusted gain
11.2.3.3
Transfer Correction
Transfer Correction is an adjustment in the reference gain setting during calibration of
the instrument, and is typically added when the surface conditions between a
calibration block and test piece are different. The coupling conditions on the test
surface can often cause signal loss after calibrating a DAC curve, which results in
inaccurate comparisons of the test reflectors with the calibrated DAC curve. The
EPOCH 650 can be easily adjusted for this potential difference by adding transfer
correction to the calibrated base gain after completing the DAC curve setup.
To add transfer correction to a completed DAC curve
1.
Choose Basic.
2.
Press dB.
3.
Use the Up and Down arrow keys or the adjustment knob to bring the scanning
gain to the desired level for transfer correction.
4.
Press Add (P2 key) to add the scanning gain to the base gain and to apply the
transfer correction.
Software Features and Options
237
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
11.2.4
JIS DAC
The Japanese Industrial Standard (JIS) DAC mode meets the requirements of JIS
Z3060. The JIS DAC curve setup is identical to the standard DAC/TCG setup.
However, any of the six curves can be used to trip the alarm when in the JIS DAC
mode. Additionally, you can set the alarm to positive or negative.
To select the curve to be used as the alarm reference level
1.
Activate the JIS DAC and then choose DAC/TCG > Next DAC.
The selected curve appears as a double thickness line.
2.
Activate an alarm and set it to either a positive or negative threshold detection.
11.2.5
Custom DAC Curves
The DAC/TCG software option for the EPOCH 650 ultrasonic flaw detector features a
DAC curve setup that allows you to define up to six additional reference curves from
the primary curve at varying levels from –24 dB to +24 dB. The Custom DAC Curves
option is ideal for unique sizing inspections and procedure development. Custom
DAC Curves also allow the option of either a straight-line connection or a curved,
polynomial connection of each point on the DAC curve to meet various international
or customer-specific requirements.
To activate and set up the customized curves
238
1.
Open the DAC/TCG setup page by choosing DAC/TCG > Setup.
2.
Press Custom (P5 key) to set the DAC/TCG Mode to custom.
3.
Select a Curve Type of Curve or Straight (polynomial or straight-line segments).
4.
Select the No Of Curves to be used in addition to the main curve (see Figure 11-12
on page 239).
5.
For each warning curve, choose Curve <1–6> dB, and set the value compared to
the main curve.
6.
Press
Chapter 11
to return to the live screen to begin capturing DAC points.
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Figure 11-12 Custom DAC setup
The custom DAC setup and functionality are the same as the Standard and ASME III
discussed earlier in this section. Figure 11-13 on page 240 shows a completed custom
DAC setup.
Software Features and Options
239
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Figure 11-13 Completed custom DAC
Once the custom DAC curve points have been captured and completed, you have full
capability to toggle between DAC and TCG views, to manipulate Range, Delay, CAL
Zero, and Angle, and also to add necessary scanning gain, curve gain adjustment or
transfer correction. The TCG view of any custom DAC curve includes the userdefined reference curves as well as the primary DAC curve. Custom DAC curve also
incorporates the reference correction functionality, if desired.
11.3
DGS/AVG
The Onboard DGS/AVG option in the EPOCH 650 ultrasonic flaw detector permits
complete DGS/AVG setups to be performed on the instrument. With the DGS/AVG
method, you can size defects based upon a calculated DGS/AVG curve for a given
transducer, material, and reflector size. This method requires that you only have one
reference-reflector in order to create a DGS curve for flaw sizing. This is much
different than the DAC or TCG method which requires that you have representative
defects at various depths within a part in order to create a curve for flaw sizing.
240
Chapter 11
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
To setup DGS/AVG curves on the instrument very quickly, Olympus has developed a
transducer library that is stored in the instrument’s memory. This library contains the
entire Atlas Series European specification conventional transducers as well as several
other transducers that are commonly used by inspectors. The library includes five
categories:
•
Straight Beam contact (includes protected face)
•
Angle Beam transducers
•
Dual Probe transducers
•
Custom Straight contact
•
Custom Angle beam
All required data for building DGS/AVG curves is stored in instrument memory for
each transducer in the library. If you want to use a probe that is not in the default
library, you can enter the required transducer characteristics in the GageView Pro
computer interface program and download them to the EPOCH 650. Probes that are
downloaded to the instrument appear in the custom transducers section of the
transducer library.
The onboard DGS/AVG option provides you with rapid setup times and easy flawsize evaluation. This software option has been designed to meet the ISO 16811:2014
requirements. It is extremely important that you be familiar with this specification
and others, and be qualified according to local standards to properly use this
instrument function. Since the curves used for defect sizing are calculated based upon
many variables, a proper instrument setup is required for accurate results.
11.3.1
Option Activation and Setup
Before activation of the DGS/AVG option, the instrument must be properly calibrated
to the material being inspected (see “Calibration” on page 143).
To activate the DGS/AVG option
1.
Choose DGS/AVG > Setup to display the AVG setup page (see Figure 11-14 on
page 242).
Software Features and Options
241
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Figure 11-14 DGS/AVG setup page
The DGS/AVG setup page allows you to define the exact probe being used for the
inspection, and to set up the DGS/AVG curve to be drawn. There are several
adjustments that can be made from this setup page:
— DGS/AVG
Activate/Deactivate the DGS/AVG function
— Probe Type
Selects the type of probe to be used (Straight Beam, Angle Beam, or Dual
Probe).
— Probe Name
Selects the actual probe to be used.
— Reflector Type
Defines the type of reflector to be used to acquire a reference indication to
build the DGS/AVG curve. For straight beam and dual probes, the available
reflectors are:
242
•
Back wall
•
Side-drilled hole (SDH)
•
Flat-bottom hole (FBH)
Chapter 11
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
For angle beam probes, the available reflectors are:
•
Side-drilled hole (SDH)
•
K1-IIW block arc
•
K2-DSC block
•
Flat-bottom hole (FBH)
— Reflector Dia.
Used for angle beam inspections only. This allows you to define the diameter
of the flat-bottom hole (FBH) or side-drilled hole (SDH) used as a referencereflector. This size is required to properly position the DGS/AVG curve.
— DeltaVK
Used for angle beam inspections with reference-reflector K1-IIW or K2-DSC
blocks only. This correction value for the angle beam transducer can be found
listed on the DGS/AVG diagram for the selected transducer.
— DeltaVT
Transfer correction value, used to compensate in amplitude differences as a
result of coupling variation (surface condition) from the calibration block to
the test piece. EN 583-2:2001 provides methods for calculating transfer
correction.
— Reg. Level
The height of the main DGS/AVG curve. The curve represents the amplitude
from a flat-bottom hole with a diameter of the registration level at different
depths. This is usually equal to the critical flaw size for the application.
— Warning Levels
These are the positions of up to three secondary DGS/AVG “warning” curves
compared to the position of the main DGS/AVG curve. If any of these values
are set to zero, the warning curve is turned off.
— ACV Specimen
This is the attenuation value in dB/m for the test piece (specimen). In some
cases, it is necessary to calculate the relative attenuation within the test piece
and enter the value here.
— ACV Cal Block
This is the attenuation value in dB/m for the calibration block. In some cases,
it is necessary to calculate the relative attenuation within the calibration block
and enter the value here.
— X Value
Software Features and Options
243
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Used for angle beam inspections only. This is the length of the transducer
wedge from the BIP to the front of the wedge, and is used to remove the
wedge length from the surface distance measurements.
You must be aware of when it is necessary to apply values to ACV Specimen and
ACV Cal Block. These values affect the shape of the DGS/AVG curve and,
therefore, affect the accuracy of defect sizing. A suggested method for the
measurement of relative attenuation can be found later in this manual.
2.
Once you have completed the selections in the DGS/AVG setup page, press
to
return the live A-scan display.
To complete the DGS/AVG curve setup
244
1.
Couple the transducer to the calibration block and obtain a reflection from the
selected reference-reflector.
2.
Press GATES to gate the reference indication.
3.
Press 2ND F, (AUTO XX%) to bring the reference-reflector to 80 % FSH.
4.
Press DGS/AVG > Ref to capture the reference-reflector and build the DGS/AVG
curve.
Chapter 11
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Figure 11-15 Reference-reflector before capture
After capturing the reference-reflector, the EPOCH 650 automatically calculates the
DGS/AVG curve(s) and displays them at the correct registration level amplitude on
the screen (see Figure 11-16 on page 246).
Software Features and Options
245
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Figure 11-16 DGS/AVG curves on screen
11.3.2
Curve Adjustment Options
Once a DGS/AVG curve has been calculated on the EPOCH 650, you can make
adjustments to that curve during an inspection. These adjustments include gain
adjustments allowing proper defect scanning and code-compliant defect sizing, as
well as reference-reflector adjustments.
11.3.3
Transfer Correction
Transfer correction is an adjustment in the reference gain setting during calibration of
the instrument. It is typically added when the surface conditions between a
calibration block and test piece are different. The coupling conditions on the test
surface can often cause signal loss after calibrating a DGS/AVG curve, which results in
inaccurate comparisons of the test reflectors with the calibrated DGS/AVG curve. The
EPOCH 650 allows you to adjust for this difference by adding transfer correction to
the calibrated base gain after completing the DGS/AVG curve setup.
The transfer correction can be added during initial setup of the DGS/AVG curve
(DeltaVt value), but typically this factor is unknown until after the setup is
completed.
246
Chapter 11
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
To add transfer correction to a completed DGS/AVG curve
 Choose DGS/AVG > Delta VT to adjust the value of the transfer correction.
When adjusting transfer correction, the curve height should remain constant, but
the echo height changes.
11.3.4
DGS/AVG Curve Gain
The overall gain level of the entire DGS/AVG curve can be adjusted higher or lower
from the reference gain. Most inspection codes do not permit reflectors to be sized
below 20 % FSH. Therefore, to inspect beyond a certain depth/sound path time within
a part, it is necessary to raise the gain of both the live A-scan and the DGS/AVG curve
to continue the inspection. This is accomplished on the EPOCH 650 using DGS/AVG
curve-adjustment gain.
To adjust the DGS/AVG curve gain
1.
2.
Press dB.
Adjust the curve gain in either coarse or fine increments.
The curve-gain difference is added/subtracted from the instrument base
(reference) gain.
DGS/AVG curve gain adjustment are applied to both the echo height and curve
height to maintain the amplitude ratio and therefore, the sizing comparisons.
Figure 11-17 on page 248 shows a DGS/AVG setup with curve-gain in use to provide
accurate echo-amplitude measurement by placing the echo close to 80 % FSH.
Software Features and Options
247
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Figure 11-17 Gain curve adjusted DGS
11.3.5
Registration Level Adjustment
The registration level of the DGS/AVG curve defines the height of the main curve. The
curve height represents the amplitude from a flat-bottom hole with a diameter of the
registration level at different depths. This is usually equal to the critical flaw size for
the application. The EPOCH 650 allows you to adjust this registration level during a
live inspection.
This curve-height adjustment is possible because the DGS/AVG curves are
calculated based on a captured reference-reflector and mathematical probe data.
This allows the EPOCH 650 to plot the attenuation curve (in steel) for a particular
size reflector without having to acquire individual data points, as is required in a
DAC/TCG setup. This is one of the key advantages of the DGS/AVG sizing
technique over the DAC/TCG sizing technique.
248
Chapter 11
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
To adjust the registration level
 Choose DGS/AVG > Reg Level to adjust the current registration-level value.
11.3.6
Relative Attenuation Measurement
There are several methods for measuring the ultrasonic attenuation within a material.
Often the procedure measures absolute attenuation in a material. This usually
requires an immersion test setup and a time-consuming set of measurements. For the
purpose of flaw sizing with the DGS/AVG method, it might be suitable in many
conditions to measure relative attenuation in the test piece or calibration block as
needed. This section outlines one simple method of relative attenuation measurement
that is generally effective. Perhaps there are more suitable methods available. You
must decide the most appropriate method to arrive at the values for ACV Specimen
and ACV Cal Block based on the application and local requirements.
Measurements:
∆ Vg = Gain difference between two successive back-wall echoes (d and 2d)
∆ Ve = From DGS/AVG diagram. Gain difference on back wall curve from d to 2d
Calculations:
∆ Vs = ∆ Vg − ∆ Ve [mm]
Sound attenuation coefficient:
α = ∆ Vs / 2d * 1000 [dB/m]
11.4
AWS D1.1/D1.5 Weld Rating Software
The AWS D1.1 software feature for the EPOCH 650 ultrasonic flaw detector has been
created to assist you in performing inspections covered under the American Welding
Society D1.1 (or D1.5) Structural Welding code for steel. This code provides inspectors
with a method to classify discontinuities found in welds using ultrasonic inspection.
This code uses the following formula to develop an indication rating for a reflector
found during an inspection:
A−B−C=D
Software Features and Options
249
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
where:
A = Discontinuity indication level (dB)
B = Reference indication level (dB)
C = Attenuation factor: 2 * (sound path – 25.4 mm [– 1 in.]) (dB)
D = Indication rating (dB)
The AWS D1.1 inspector must take the Indication Rating (D) that is calculated based
on A, B, and C to an “Ultrasonic Acceptance – Rejection Criteria” table produced by
the AWS in order to classify the severity of the discontinuity that has been located. As
an inspection is performed, you are required to develop an AWS report that lists the
values for all variables listed above as well as transducer information, discontinuity
length and location, and your overall evaluation of the discontinuity.
For further details regarding the test equipment, methods, interpretation, and
classification requirements for these inspections, refer to the AWS D1.1 Code Book.
The goal of the AWS D1.1 software feature is that of simplifying inspector tasks and
lowering the overall inspection time. The EPOCH 650 does this by automatically
performing required calculations. It also by permits the inspector to document
discontinuities in the data logger for reporting purposes.
The EPOCH 650 can also transfer inspection data through GageView Pro to aid in
report generation. This program allows an inspector to view the instrument’s setup
parameters, the waveform generated by a discontinuity, the sound path and location
information of the discontinuity, and all values for the AWS D1.1 formula variables.
11.4.1
Activating the AWS D1.1 software option
The first step in operating the EPOCH 650 ultrasonic flaw detector for AWS D1.1
inspections is to calibrate the instrument for the transducer and test conditions. For
information on the angle beam calibration of the EPOCH 650, see “Calibration” on
page 143, or follow the appropriate guidelines from the American Welding Society.
To activate the AWS software feature
1.
Select AWS > Setup.
The AWS setup page appears (see Figure 11-18 on page 251).
2.
250
Set AWS = On.
Chapter 11
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
3.
Press
to return to the live screen.
4.
Set a Ref B value to begin AWS inspection.
The Ref B value represents the gain level necessary to bring the echo from a
reference-reflector to a user defined full-screen height (FSH).
Figure 11-18 AWS setup page
11.4.2
Adjusting the AWS Reference Level
The EPOCH 650 ultrasonic flaw detector allows you to define the reference level to
adhere to best practices and procedures. The reference-reflector is often a side-drilled
hole in the calibration block used for the angle beam calibration. Other referencereflectors can be used provided that they meet AWS requirements for these
inspections.
To adjust the reference level for echo evaluation
 In the live AWS screen, press P3, and then adjust the value to the proper reference
height.
Software Features and Options
251
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
11.4.3
Storing the Gated Reflector
You can store the gated reflector as the Ref B value.
To store a Ref B value
1.
Use the GATES key to gate the echo from the reference-reflector. Move the probe
forward and backward to bring the echo to its maximum amplitude (peak), using
Peak Memory if necessary.
2.
Press 2ND F, (AUTO XX%) to bring the maximum peak of the gated echo to
reference height.
3.
Choose AWS > Ref B to store the gated reflector as the Ref B value and choose
YES to confirm (see Figure 11-19 on page 252).
Figure 11-19 Reference B value before storage
Once the Ref B value is stored, the instrument displays a live D rating of any gated
indication (see Figure 11-20 on page 253). This live D value, which represents the
defect indication rating used with the published “AWS Acceptance - Rejection
Criteria” tables to classify a potential flaw, can be viewed as a separate measurement
reading in one of the five boxes. To activate and view this measurement, see “Setup
Pages” on page 86.
252
Chapter 11
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Figure 11-20 Active AWS with D rating
11.4.4
Scanning Gain
AWS codes require that you enter a certain amount of scanning gain to the Ref B gain
value. This allows you to locate flaws that might be smaller or deeper in the test piece
than the reference flaw.
To add scanning gain
1.
Use the dB key to adjust the scanning-gain value necessary to perform the
inspection as outlined by the AWS Code.
2.
Press Scan dB (P2 key) to toggle the scanning gain on and off as necessary.
To display a D indication rating value, the gated echo must peak at an amplitude
less than 110 % FSH (full screen height). You may need to turn off the scanning
gain, and even make further gain adjustments to bring the echo peak on screen.
Software Features and Options
253
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
11.4.5
Calculating A and C Values
When a gated echo whose peak is below 100 % FSH is present, the EPOCH 650
ultrasonic flaw detector automatically calculates the A and C values necessary to
provide a D indication rating value. For A, the EPOCH 650 automatically calculates
the required dB value to bring the gated echo to reference height. To calculate C, the
EPOCH 650 uses the data in the sound path calculator to generate an attenuation
factor.
In order for this calculation to be accurate, you must enter the correct thickness
for the test piece.
By pressing SAVE, you can now save the data for this discontinuity in the EPOCH 650
data logger. For general data logger information, see “Data Logger” on page 187.
At the bottom of an ID saved with AWS D1.1 active, you can see the values for A, B, C,
and D. This data can be viewed in the file review window.
You can also choose to see live A, B, and C values displayed in the reading
measurement boxes at the top of the screen.
While using the EPOCH 650 and the AWS D1.1 software feature, you must
account for any inspection conditions that could cause variations in the displayed
indication rating (D value), and properly interpret the meaning of echo
indications and reported D values corresponding to these indications.
11.5
API 5UE
The API 5UE software option for the EPOCH 650 ultrasonic flaw detector is intended
to assist with performing inspections in accordance with the American Petroleum
Institute (API) Recommended Practice 5UE. This practice was developed specifically
for OCTG manufacturers to inspect and characterize inner-diameter (ID) cracking in
newly fabricated pipe. The API 5UE code uses two crack sizing methods to
254
Chapter 11
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
characterize ID cracking: the Amplitude Comparison Technique (ACT) and the
Amplitude-Distance Differential Technique (ADDT). The software developed for the
EPOCH 650 aids in performing the ADDT method, which uses the following formula
to determine ID crack size:
d i = A max × ( T 2 – T 1 ) × k
where:
di = imperfection size
Amax = Maximum amplitude returned from defect area (usually 80 %)
T1 = 6 dB drop point from leading peak of Amax (distance or time)
T2 = 6 dB drop point from trailing peak of Amax (distance or time)
k = A constant calculated from calibration to a reference notch
During an inspection using the ADDT method from the API 5UE practice, a crack that
could possibly be rejected is found and inspected to find its peak amplitude. This
amplitude is then set to 80 % of full screen height (FSH) and designated as Amax. The
transducer is then moved towards the crack until the signal has dropped 6 dB, or to ½
the screen height of Amax. This position is noted as T1. The transducer is then moved
away from the crack until the signal has dropped 6 dB on the other side of Amax. This
position is noted as T2. Using these measurements, along with a k factor constant
calculated during calibration, the crack size di is calculated and recorded.
For further details regarding this calculation, along with the calculation of the “k
factor” constant, refer to API’s Recommended Practice 5UE specification.
The API 5UE software option can greatly simplify the number of operations needed to
perform the ADDT test, and to greatly reduce your overall inspection time. This is
accomplished using the Peak Memory function to draw a peak envelope of the crack
signal and quickly capture the Amax, T1, and T2 points using a single key press. Using
this collected data from the peak envelope, the EPOCH 650 performs the necessary
calculation using the formula above and displays the crack height in the upper right
corner of the screen (see Figure 11-21 on page 256). You can then save all relevant
values of the inspected crack to the data logger for reporting purposes or transfer the
values to a PC using GageView Pro.
Software Features and Options
255
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Figure 11-21 Completed API 5UE sizing
11.5.1
Option Activation and Setup
If the API 5UE software option has been licensed on the instrument, it can be activated
at any time during standard operation.
To activate the API 5UE software option
256
1.
Select API5UE > Setup.
2.
In the API5UE menu, select API5UE = On (see Figure 11-22 on page 257).
3.
Press NEXT, and then enter the known height of the calibration reference notch in
the Ref. Depth box.
4.
Press
Chapter 11
to return to the live screen.
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Figure 11-22 Waveform averaging option setup
When API 5UE is activated, the function keys on the EPOCH 650 aid the inspector in
collecting calibration and inspection data. Also, the AUTO XX% feature allows you to
automatically bring any captured echo to 80 % of FSH, which is particularly helpful in
obtaining a precise Amax reading from a reference notch.
The API 5UE code specifies that before inspection, the instrument must be calibrated
using a reference notch of known depth (in certain circumstances, a through-drilled
hole is desirable for calibration – see the full text of the API Recommended Practice
5UE for details concerning reference standard selection). The depth of this reference
notch must be entered correctly in the activation menu for the API 5UE software
option.
Before calibrating with a reference notch, the instrument should be calibrated to
verify beam index point, refracted angle and distance in the inspection material. See
“Calibrating to Known Sound Path Values with an Angle Beam Transducer” on
page 165 and “Calibrating to Known Depth Values with an Angle Beam Transducer”
on page 175 for details regarding angle beam calibration.
Software Features and Options
257
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
11.5.2
Envelope Mode
The simplest method for inspection of crack depth is using API 5UE in Envelope
Mode. This method allows the operator to collect all pertinent data with the press of a
single key and size potential defects in the most efficient manner.
11.5.2.1
Envelope Mode Calibration
Calibrating for API 5UE inspection in Envelope mode requires the activation of the
Peak Memory function.
To calibrate in Envelope mode
1.
Press PEAK MEM to activate the Peak Memory function.
The letter P appears to the right of the live A-Scan display (see Figure 11-23 on
page 259).
258
2.
Find the reflection from the calibration notch and press 2ND F, (AUTO XX%) to
bring this indication to 80 % FSH.
3.
Adjust gate 1 so that it surrounds the indication.
4.
Move the transducer forward and backward over the notch to draw a peak
envelope of the echo dynamics of the notch.
5.
Press Collect (P1 key) to collect the Amax, T1, and T2 data from the envelope (see
Figure 11-23 on page 259).
6.
Press P5 to move from calibration mode to Inspect mode.
Chapter 11
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Figure 11-23 Calibration data in collect mode
11.5.2.2
Crack Sizing
The EPOCH 650 automatically collects Amax, T1, and T2 and calculates a “k factor”
from the known reference height dr. These three collected values (Amax, T1, and T2)
are displayed on the screen in their respective positions using “□” marks.
Once you are satisfied with the collected calibration data, press P5 to move from
Calibration mode to Inspect mode (see Figure 11-24 on page 260).
Software Features and Options
259
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Figure 11-24 The Inspect mode
Crack sizes are displayed under the “Di” measurement (see “Reading Setup Page” on
page 91).
With the Peak Memory function active, the EPOCH 650 defaults to Envelope mode for
crack sizing. Use the following steps to size a crack using Envelope mode.
To size a crack using Envelope mode
260
1.
Press PEAK MEM to activate the Peak Memory function.
2.
Find the signal from the potential defect and bring to maximum amplitude (see
API’s Recommended Practice 5UE for crack scanning and inspection
requirements).
3.
If necessary, press 2ND F, (AUTO XX%) to bring the peak amplitude to 80 % of FSH.
4.
Scan forward and backward from the peak amplitude of the crack to draw a
“peak envelope” of the crack signal.
5.
Adjust your screen range to adequately encompass the entire peak envelope, and
then set the gate level to less than half the peak amplitude height (in % FSH).
6.
Press P1 to collect Amax, T1, and T2 from the peak envelope.
Chapter 11
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
The crack size indication (di) appears at the top right corner of the live A-Scan
display.
7.
Find the reflection from the calibration notch and press 2ND F, (AUTO XX%) to
bring this indication to 80 % FSH
8.
Adjust gate 1 so that it surrounds the indication.
9.
Move the transducer forward and backward over the notch to draw a peak
envelope of the echo dynamics of the notch.
10. Press P1 to collect the Amax, T1, and T2 data from the envelope.
11. Press P5 to move from calibration mode to Inspect mode.
To inspect a separate crack, or to collect new data for the same crack, press P6 to clear
the current data and follow the steps above to inspect again.
11.5.3
Manual Mode
You can also use the Manual mode approach with the API 5UE option. This mode
allows you to manually select the Amax, T1, and T2 points from a live A-Scan to obtain
a crack depth indication. With the Peak Memory function off, you can manually
collect each calibration data point to calibrate the instrument for inspection.
11.5.3.1
Manual Mode Calibration
To calibrate in Manual mode
1.
Activate the API 5UE software and input a reference notch depth.
2.
Find the signal from the reference notch.
3.
Adjust the screen range to adequately display the full range of motion of the
reference notch signal.
4.
Adjust gate 1 to encompass the full range of motion of the reference notch signal,
and then bring the gate to below 40 % FSH.
5.
Find the reflection from the calibration notch and AUTO 80% to bring this
indication to 80 % FSH.
6.
Press RefAMax (P1) to store the Amax point, and then press RefAMax again to
confirm (see Figure 11-25 on page 262).
Software Features and Options
261
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Figure 11-25 Storing the Amax point
262
7.
Move the transducer forward over the notch until the peak drops to 40 % FSH on
the leading edge of the signal.
8.
Press RefT1 (P2) to collect the 6 dB drop position of the leading peak and assign
this value as T1 (see Figure 11-26 on page 263).
Chapter 11
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Figure 11-26 Storing the T1 point
9.
Move the transducer backward over the notch until the peak drops rises to 80 %
and then falls back to 40 % FSH on the trailing edge of the signal.
10. Press RefT2 (P3) to collect the 6 dB drop position of the trailing peak and assign
this value as T2 (see Figure 11-27 on page 264).
Software Features and Options
263
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Figure 11-27 Storing the T2 point
11. Press Clear (P5) to complete the calibration and move to the Inspect mode.
12. If you are not satisfied with the collected points, you can overwrite a particular
point using the previous parameter keys (P1, P2, or P3), or press Clear (P5) to
clear the entire calibration and begin again.
11.5.3.2
Crack Sizing
Once the API 5UE software has been properly calibrated to a reference notch, use the
following steps to size a crack using Manual mode.
To size a crack using Manual mode
264
1.
Find the signal from the potential defect bring to maximum amplitude (see API’s
Recommended Practice 5UE for crack scanning and inspection requirements).
2.
If necessary, use 2ND F, (AUTO XX%) to bring the peak amplitude to 80 % of FSH
to ensure the peak amplitude is displayed on the screen.
3.
Press RefAMax (P2) to assign this peak amplitude value as Amax. Note the value
of the peak amplitude in %FSH.
Chapter 11
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
4.
Move the transducer towards the potential defect until the peak has dropped to ½
the value of Amax (in % FSH) on the leading edge of the signal.
5.
Press the T1 key (P2) to collect the 6dB drop position of the leading peak and
assign this value as T1.
6.
Move the transducer away from the potential defect until the peak has dropped to
½ the value of Amax (in % FSH) on the trailing edge of the signal.
7.
Press the T2 key (P3) to collect the 6 dB drop position of the trailing peak and
assign this value as T2.
The crack size indication appears at the top right corner of the live A-Scan display.
8.
To inspect a separate crack, or to collect new data for the same crack, press P6 to
Clear the current data and follow the steps above to inspect again.
At any time during an inspection in either Envelope mode or Manual mode, it is
possible to re-calibrate the instrument. Press the RE-CAL function key (F5) to enter
the calibration mode and follow the steps defined in “Envelope Mode Calibration” on
page 258 and “Calibration” on page 143 to re-calibrate.
11.6
Waveform Averaging
The Waveform Averaging software option allows the live A-scan view to represent an
average of successively acquired A-scans. Waveform averaging improves signal-tonoise ratio when static flaws are detected.
You should not use waveform averaging when dynamically scanning a test material
for flaws. Doing so will average out the high peak flaw echoes with the lower
amplitude clean signals that surround it, making it harder to identify specific flaw
signals.
You can select the precision of the averaging, choosing between 2X, 4X, 8X, 16X, or
32X averaging to remove spurious noise signals from the A-scan while maintaining
relevant signals.
Software Features and Options
265
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
11.6.1
Waveform Averaging Setup
If the Waveform Averaging software option has been licensed on the instrument, it
can be activated at any time during standard operation.
To activate the Waveform Averaging software feature
1.
Select Meas Setup > Special (group 3/5).
The Special screen appears (see Figure 11-28 on page 266).
2.
In the Special menu, select Average.
3.
Select the level of averaging.
4.
Press
to return to the live screen.
Figure 11-28 Waveform Averaging option setup
11.6.2
Using Waveform Averaging
When Waveform Averaging is on, the xAv flag (
) is displayed in the flag area to
alert you that the option is active (see Figure 11-29 on page 267).
266
Chapter 11
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
xAv flag on screen
Figure 11-29 The Waveform Averaging screen
It is important to note that the effective measurement rate when using the averaging
software is not equal to the PRF as it is in standard mode. The effective measurement
rate when using the averaging option is equal to the total PRF divided by the
averaging factor.
At higher averaging rates, the screen update rate may be less than 60 Hz (depending
on the PRF value). If the screen update falls below 60 Hz (the industry standard), an
icon (
) displays in the flag area of the screen (see Figure 11-30 on page 268).
Software Features and Options
267
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Flag indicating
screen update
rate is less than
60 Hz
Figure 11-30 Update rate less than 60 Hz
11.7
Back Wall Echo Attenuator
The back wall echo attenuator (BEA) option allows you to apply an independent gain
level to the A-scan defined by the gate 2 start position and width. Using the BEA, you
can reduce the amplitude of the back wall echo when high gain levels are used to find
small flaws.
NOTE
The BEA feature is not compatible with the interface gate or DGS.
This option is commonly used with two specific forms of inspections:
•
268
The first is an inspection where potential defects may not be oriented parallel to
the direction of sound from the transducer. Sound will still reflect from these
defects, but the reflection may be directed away from the transducer. In this
situation, little or no signal is returned to the instrument for direct measurement.
Generally, these defects are instead detected by monitoring for back wall signal
loss or attenuation. This back wall amplitude change can be missed entirely if the
back wall signal is saturated. The BEA allows you to monitor the back wall at a
Chapter 11
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
lower gain setting for any signal loss, while still scanning the remainder of the test
piece at a high gain level for small defects.
•
In the second form of inspection (similar to the first), the BEA is used in porosity
inspections. Porosity tends to scatter sound instead of returning a clear echo. In
this situation, back wall amplitude may be the only way to positively differentiate
porosity from material grain structure. The BEA is used to display the entire back
wall signal on the screen so that it can be closely monitored.
Both inspection forms are useful when detecting very small defects.
To activate the BEA
1.
2.
Choose the Gate2 menu item (group 2/5).
Press Status (P7 key) then select BEA.
When the BEA is activated, gate 2 is on and displayed in its previous position.
Figure 11-31 Activating the BEA
Operating the BEA
The BEA option displays an independent back wall gain in the BEA Gain parameter
(P6 key). This control replaces the Gate 2 Min Depth parameter while BEA is active.
This gain is applied within the screen range after the start of gate 1.
Software Features and Options
269
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Initially, this base gain level is activated to show the same gain level as the primary
gain control. If the primary gain control consists of a reference gain setting and
scanning dB, the base gain level of the BEA will be the sum of the reference and
scanning gain levels. You can adjust the BEA gain independently to suppress the back
wall echo. Measurements and alarms under gate 2 are based on the attenuated echo.
To adjust back wall gain
1.
Press BEA Gain (P6 key).
2.
Manually adjust the gain or press 2ND F, (AUTO XX%) to automatically adjust the
echo in the BEA gate to the reference height (XX%) (see Figure 11-32 on page 270).
3.
Use gate 2 Start (P2 key), Width (P3 key), and Level (P4 key), to adjust the BEA
gate position.
4.
Use Zoom to expand the signal display while adjusting parameters (see
“Zooming on a Gate” on page 132.
Figure 11-32 Adjusting back wall gain
When BEA is active, Gate 2 can be positioned anywhere on the visible screen range, to
the extent of overlapping Gate 1.
270
Chapter 11
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
11.8
Interface Gate
The EPOCH 650 interface gate (a third gate) is intended for immersion applications
where the water path distance between the front surface of the test material and the
transducer face is continuously changing. The application may involve an “on-line”
type approach with the test material moving steadily past a stationary transducer (or
vice versa). If the front surface of the test material is not uniform, a slight difference in
the water path distance may result. The interface gate option tracks the position of the
reflection from the interface of the water path and test piece and compensates for the
variance in this reflector’s position. The interface gate is also commonly used with
captive water column transducers.
11.8.1
Activating the Interface Gate
When the interface gate option is enabled, the GateIF and GateIF Setup submenus
become available.
To activate the interface gate
1.
Navigate to the GateIF menu item (group 2/5).
2.
Use the adjustment knob or arrow keys to set the Status to On
NOTE
When the IF gate is activated, the gate tracking mode of all additional active gates is
automatically set to track to the IF gate. Gate 1 and gate 2 measurements cannot be
made with reference to the calibrated zero point when the IF gate is on, but gate 1
must reference the IF gate. Gate 2 (if used) can be set to track either the IF gate or
gate1.
11.8.2
Adjusting the interface gate
The interface gate is adjusted from the Gate IF menu item.
To adjust the interface gate
 Use Gate IF > Start (P2 key), Gate IF > Width (P3 key), and Gate IF > Level
(P4 key), to adjust the BEA gate position.
Software Features and Options
271
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
11.8.3
Setting the Material Velocity
Since the interface gate is often measuring the water path distance from the initial
pulse of the instrument to the interface surface of the test material, the EPOCH 650
allows the thickness measurement from the interface gate to be made using a different
material velocity than Gate 1 or Gate 2 measurements.
To set the material velocity
1.
Navigate to the GateIF Setup menu item (group 2/5).
2.
Press Velocity (P7 key).
3.
Use the adjustment knob or arrow keys to set the required velocity (see
Figure 11-33 on page 272).
Figure 11-33 Setting the material velocity
11.8.4
Using Run Mode
Run mode captures and tracks the indication breaking the interface gate and holds
this reflection at the left side of the display. This mode eliminates visibility to the
sound path of the signal before the interface of the test material. In many cases this is
a long water path and does not provide relevant inspection information.
272
Chapter 11
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Run mode is also useful when the sound path from the initial pulse to the reflection in
the interface echo varies because of transducer or test piece movement or other
factors. In run mode, any variation in the position of the echo inside the interface gate
is not visible, as this echo is actively held to the left side of the display. This allows
more stable visibility to the test material reflection positions regardless of interface
variation.
Note that the indication being tracked by the interface gate is determined by the gate
measurement mode. For instance, if the interface gate is in edge detection mode, the
tracked indication is the first echo to break the interface gate threshold.
To adjust the interface gate run mode
1.
Navigate to the GateIF Setup menu item (group 2/5).
2.
Press GIF Run (P3 key).
3.
Use the adjustment knob or arrow keys to set the parameter to On (see
Figure 11-34 on page 273).
Figure 11-34 Setting the gate interface run mode
Software Features and Options
273
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
11.8.5
Interface Gate Compatibility
The interface gate can be used with other software features, such as TCG and
Template Storage. This allows these features to operate during immersion inspections
in addition to manual inspections.
You must activate the interface gate before activating any additional software feature.
Once the additional feature is activated and properly set up, it will track to the
position of the reflection in the interface gate.
Figure 11-35 on page 274 shows an example of the interface gate and TCG when used
together. The TCG is indicated by the horizontal, purple line at the top of the A-scan
display. In this example, any change in the position of the echo in the interface gate
causes the entire TCG window to be shifted. As a result, dynamic amplification of
defect echoes in the TCG window are consistently applied regardless of shifts in the
interface echo position. For more information on TCG, see “Dynamic DAC/TCG” on
page 226.
Figure 11-35 Interface gate and TCG
274
Chapter 11
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
11.8.6
Gate Measurements and Alarms
The interface gate does not allow the same standard measurements as gate 1 and
gate 2. The interface gate only measures the thickness of a given indication, when
applicable.
Individual gate alarms can be set while the interface gate is active. The negative
threshold alarm is most common when looking for interface echo drop-out. For more
information about setting up gate alarms, see “Gate Alarms” on page 133.
11.9
Corrosion Module
The EPOCH 650 ultrasonic flaw detector Corrosion Module provides a rapid and
simple solution for flaw detector users to perform basic corrosion inspections. This
feature provides simplified instrument operation for corrosion applications, requiring
less set up time and more efficient data collection. The Corrosion Module leverages
many of the inspection features used in dedicated corrosion thickness gages while
maintaining a close connection to standard flaw detector operation.
Once the appropriate preset dual transducer is selected, the Corrosion Module
automatically adjusts the pulser and receiver settings to optimize the ultrasonic setup.
Measurement thresholds and gain adjustments are also handled automatically,
allowing immediate thickness measurements with minimal operator intervention.
11.9.1
Key Features
Several key features are included in the EPOCH 650 ultrasonic flaw detector
Corrosion Module that vary from standard flaw detector operation.
•
Automatic Zero
Automatic Zero corrects for internal electronic delays, cabling delays and
transducer delays to the end of the delay line. Automatic Zero calculates the zero
offset of the system by measuring the time-of-flight of sound through the end of
the delay material on the connected dual probe. While this measurement does not
correct for couplant variation or surface conditions of the test piece, it calculates
the majority of the zero offset value required for accurate material measurements
before you couple the transducer to the test piece.
•
Automatic Gain Compensation
Automatic Gain Compensation (AGC) allows the EPOCH 650 to acquire
consistent measurements. The AGC continuously optimizes the most prominent
Software Features and Options
275
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
signal (largest echo) on screen by automatically adjusting the gain level of the
system. AGC adjusts this largest echo signal on screen to a predetermined height
(based on the selected probe), to maintain a consistent echo height and shape.
•
Zero Cross Detection Algorithm
The Corrosion Module uses a unique measurement mode called the Zero Cross
detection algorithm. This measurement mode, unlike Peak, Edge, or First Peak
mode, uses the first point in time when the echo of interest crosses the baseline
(zero cross) to make the measurement. By using the zero cross point, the
measurement is not affected by variation in amplitude, which is a major source of
inaccuracy in traditional flaw detector corrosion applications. To be recognized as
the “echo of interest,” an echo must be higher than a fixed screen height
threshold. To ensure prominent echoes achieve this criteria, AGC is used to
maintain dynamically optimized amplification of the A-scan.
•
V-Path Correction
The EPOCH 650 Corrosion Module includes V-path correction for all dual probes
in its standard probe library. Dual transducers are typically constructed with a
small angle of incidence in both the transmit and receive crystals. This small angle
is known as the “roof angle.” Because of the roof angle, sound is introduced to a
test piece at a small refracted angle. Therefore, the actual depth of a given
reflector is slightly smaller than the measured depth unless the measurement
includes a correction for this roof angle. The angle correction is called “V-Path
Correction,” and is achieved when the roof angle of a given dual transducer is
known and compensated for during measurement.
11.9.2
Corrosion Module Screen
The EPOCH 650 ultrasonic flaw detector Corrosion Module has a modified screen
layout compared to standard flaw detector mode. Also, many of the normal flaw
detection functions are limited or unavailable when in the Corrosion Module (see
Figure 11-36 on page 277).
Measurement Boxes – The measurement boxes are fixed in Corrosion Module to more
limited selections applicable to corrosion measurement only.
Gain Control – The Gain control is set to Auto when AGC is active
Measurement Region – The measurement region is defined by the gate at the top of
the A-scan window. Gate level adjustment is not available in Corrosion Module
because the measurement mode is fixed to “Zero Cross.”
276
Chapter 11
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Measurement Indicator – The measurement indicator is located at the bottom of the
A-scan window to show more accurately where the zero cross measurement is being
acquired.
Measurement indicator
Figure 11-36 Corrosion Module screen
A common visual tool used in Corrosion Module is the Grid View. For more
information, see “Grid View” on page 217.
Software Features and Options
277
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Figure 11-37 Corrosion Module grid view
11.9.3
Corrosion Module Activation and Setup
The Corrosion Module can be quickly activated and set up. When the Corrosion
Module is first activated, the Transducer Setup page is displayed. The Transducer
Setup page allows you to select the dual transducer you will use during your
inspection. When a transducer is selected, key parameters for the selected transducer
are loaded with default values. These values are shown on the right side of the
Transducer Setup page.
To activate the Corrosion Module
1.
Choose Inst Setup> General.
2.
Highlight the Corrosion Gage row at the bottom of this menu and select On (P2
key).
3.
Press
to finish the activation and display the Transducer Setup page (see
Figure 11-38 on page 279).
To set up the dual transducer
1.
278
Connect an appropriate dual transducer to the EPOCH 650.
Chapter 11
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
2.
In the Transducer Setup menu, select the connected dual transducer from the list.
IMPORTANT
The proper selection of the dual transducer is critical for proper operation of the
Corrosion Module.
Figure 11-38 Corrosion Module transducer Setup menu
3.
Press
to continue.
4.
Follow the prompt to wipe the couplant off the probe, then press Continue
(P1 key).
The Corrosion Module automatically measures the zero offset of the probe delay
line (Do-Zero). The EPOCH 650 is now zeroed and ready to make measurements.
Software Features and Options
279
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
11.9.4
Basic Measurement Adjustments
The accuracy of measurements can be enhanced by performing a two-point
calibration (see “Measurement calibration” on page 62), but the combination of
default settings from the Transducer Setup menu and the Do-Zero function allows
immediate measurements with a reasonable amount of accuracy.
Common adjustments in the basic Corrosion Module measurement mode include:
•
Rectification
•
Extended Blank Control
•
Manual Gain Adjustment
11.9.4.1
Rectification
All rectification views are available in Corrosion Module, including Fullwave and RF
(most common selections).
11.9.4.2
Extended Blank Control
Based on material and (or) transducer, the Corrosion Module detection algorithm
may incorrectly trigger measurements from a signal before the first back wall. This
signal can be caused by surface conditions, transducer cross talk, or other factors (see
Figure 11-39 on page 281).
280
Chapter 11
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Figure 11-39 Incorrectly triggered measurement
If this situation occurs, you can adjust the start position in time of the measurement
window by adjusting the start position of Gate 1.
To adjust the measurement window start position
 Press GATES and increase or decrease the gate 1 start position.
11.9.4.3
Manual Gain Adjustment
While Automatic Gain Compensation (AGC) is recommended when measuring in the
Corrosion Module, some applications may require manual adjustment of gain to
achieve optimal results. Often this requirement is related to transducer sensitivity. If
the transducer sensitivity is low, the default initial gain for the transducer may not be
sufficient to allow measurements in AGC mode. If the transducer is overly sensitive,
or the test material is highly transmissive, the default initial gain may be too high and
result in amplified noise or cross talk, causing incorrect measurements.
To manually adjust the gain parameter
1.
Choose Corrosn Setup > AGC (group 3/4).
Software Features and Options
281
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
2.
Use the knob or arrow keys to set AGC to Off (see Figure 11-40 on page 282).
Figure 11-40 Corrosion Module AGC set to Off
3.
282
Press dB and press a parameter key (P1–P7) to set a gain range, then use the knob
or arrow keys to adjust the gain value (see Figure 11-40 on page 282).
Chapter 11
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Figure 11-41 Adjusting the Corrosion Module gain value
11.9.5
Calibration for Additional Accuracy
For additional measurement accuracy, you can perform a two point calibration while
the Corrosion Module is active. See “Calibration” on page 62 for instructions on
performing a two point calibration. Remember that the calibration must be performed
using an Olympus dual transducer.
11.9.6
Echo-to-Echo Measurements
The Echo-to-Echo function measures the distance between an echo in Gate 2 and an
echo in Gate 1. In some limited applications, you may want to measure the thickness
of a material using this function. The Echo-to-Echo function is most common when
measuring coated materials, as a measurement of the first back wall will include the
thickness of the coating. By measuring the distance between the second successive
back wall and the first, a more accurate measurement of the base material is obtained.
This allows you to ignore the coating layer.
To perform an echo-to-echo measurement
1.
Use the NEXT key to navigate to the Gate2 menu item (group 2/4).
Software Features and Options
283
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
2.
Use the knob or arrow keys to change the Status parameter (P7) to On.
3.
The measurement box automatically changes to measure Gate 2 – Gate 1.
4.
Choose the Rcvr menu item (group 1/4).
5.
Use the knob or arrow keys to change the Rect parameter (P1) to RF so you can
view the positive and negative amplitude values.
Figure 11-42 Corrosion Module echo measurement
As a result of the roof angle of dual transducers, often a shear wave is also produced
in the inspection material when using a dual probe. Shear wave velocity is slower
than longitudinal wave, so the shear component is displayed after the first backwall
echo. If the shear wave component is significant enough to cross the measurement
threshold, it can trigger a false measurement from the gate 2 region in Echo-to-Echo
mode. This causes a measurement error (see Figure 11-43 on page 285).
284
Chapter 11
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Figure 11-43 Echo measurement error
If this situation occurs, you can adjust the start position in time of the second back
wall measurement window by adjusting the start position of Gate 2.
To adjust the measurement window start position
1.
Press the Gates key until G2Start is highlighted.
2.
Use the knob or arrow keys to increase the gate 2 start position until the shear
component is no longer measured.
11.9.7
B-Scan
The B-scan feature allows you to collect a single value B-scan from measurements
made in the Corrosion Module. A single value B-scan represents the side profile of a
test material based on thickness or time-of-flight (TOF) measurement. This view,
typically used in corrosion scanning applications, is used to verify acquired thickness
measurements, and also to provide a visual reference showing areas on the part with
critical thickness values.
Software Features and Options
285
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
A scanner equipped with an internal encoder mechanism can provide transducer
location information (distance traveled) in addition to the thickness reading. This
feature increases the functional value of the B-scan as relative location in the material
is directly correlated with a thickness measurement at that location. The maximum
scan rate is 30 Hz.
The B-scan has three separate operating modes:
•
Bidirectional Encoded Mode
This mode requires the use of a bidirectional encoder that records location
information as data is collected in both forward and backward directions.
•
Unidirectional Encoded Mode
This mode requires the use of a bidirectional or unidirectional encoder and
records location information as data is collected in either the forward or backward
direction as if data is collected in one direction only.
•
Manual (Timed) Mode
This mode does not record location information and does not require the use of
an encoder. This mode provides a continuous scan of thickness data with no
correlation to its location along the scan. Readings are collected at a maximum of
30 Hz and are not related to transducer movement.
11.9.7.1
Activating the B-Scan
Before activating the B-scan, you should create and open an inspection file in the
instrument data logger. For instructions on creating and opening an inspection file,
see “Data Logger” on page 187.
To activate the B-scan
286
1.
Navigate to the B-Scan menu item (group 3/4) shown in Figure 11-44 on page 287.
2.
Choose B-Scan (P2 key).
3.
In the B-Scan setup page set the value of each field (see Figure 11-45 on page 289).
4.
Press
Chapter 11
to return to the live screen.
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Figure 11-44 B-scan menu item
11.9.7.2
B-Scan Setup Page
The B-Scan setup screen displays fields that allow you to enter or modify the
following information.
•
B-scan Enable (On, Off)
Activates or deactivates the B-scan function.
•
Encoder Mode (Bi-Directional, Uni-Directional, Manual)
Sets the method of B-scan acquisition to either Bi-Directional, Uni-Directional, or
Manual (timed).
•
Scan Display Size (Half Size, Full Size)
Selects the live screen size of the B-scan.
•
Direction (L to R, R to L)
Sets the live data collection direction of the B-scan as either left-to-right or rightto-left.
•
Display Color (Mono, Color)
Toggles the B-scan image color between Mono (single color) and Color (three
color zones indicating acquired scan thickness regions).
Software Features and Options
287
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
When Display Color is set to Color all thickness values between the Low Range
Thickness value and the High Range Thickness value are drawn using the color
yellow.
— Low Range Thickness
Sets the thickness value below which the B-scan is drawn using the color red
(Color scan only).
— High Range Thickness
Sets the thickness value above which the B-scan is drawn using the color
green (Color scan only).
•
Encoder Resolution
Fixed property of the connected encoder, sets the number of encoder pulses per
unit of measure (encoded B-scan only).
•
Scan Resolution (0.13 mm, 0.26 mm, 0.38 mm, 0.51 mm)[0.005 in., 0.010 in., 0.015
in., 0.020 in.]
Sets the interval of successive measurements (encoded B-scan only). The reading
resolution can be changed in the following increments:
— 0.13 mm (0.005 in.) — Takes a reading every 1 pulse
— 0.26 mm (0.010 in.) — Takes a reading every 2 pulses
— 0.38 mm (0.015 in.) — Takes a reading every 3 pulses
— 0.51 mm (0.020 in.) — Takes a reading every 4 pulses, and so on.
Scan resolution is limited to increments of the encoder resolution that you are
using. For example, if the encoder resolution is 7.87 pulses/mm (200 pulses/in.),
then the best resolution possible is 0.127 mm (0.005 in.). Each pulse from the
encoder is capable of taking readings in increments of 0.127 mm (0.005 in.).
•
Start Coordinate
Sets the starting Distance Travelled (DT) position of the scan (encoded B-scan
only).
•
Stop on LOS
Activates or deactivates the function to stop B-scan data acquisition when a Loss
of Signal (LOS) measurement occurs.
288
Chapter 11
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Figure 11-45 B-Scan setup page
11.9.7.3
B-Scan Acquisition and Control
In the live screen, use the B-scan controls (displayed over the parameter keys) to
acquire your B-scan image.
•
Start (Stop)
Use this control to start or stop the acquisition of your B-scan image
NOTE
In Bi-Directional or Uni-Directional Encoder Modes, acquisition of the B-scan does
not begin until the attached encoder is moved. In Timed Encoder Mode, acquisition of
the B-scan begins as soon as you press the Start button (P1 key).
•
New Scan
Use this control to start a new B-scan. All current B-scan data is erased.
•
Setup
Returns you to the B-scan setup screen. All current B-scan data is erased.
•
Save Min
Software Features and Options
289
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Saves the entire collected B-scan to the active file ID including one compressed Ascan representing the minimum thickness reading of the collected B-scan
(excluding A-scan for LOS conditions).
•
Save
Saves the entire collected B-scan to the active file ID including the last acquired
compressed A-scan (excluding A-scan for LOS conditions).
During B-scan acquisition, a blue indicator appears at the bottom of the B-scan
window (see Figure 11-46 on page 290). This blue arrow indicates the B-scan position
associated with the minimum thickness data point (excluding LOS data).
Figure 11-46 B-scan position indicator
11.9.7.4
Viewing the B-Scan in the Data Logger
Once B-scan data is saved to a file, it can be displayed in the data logger. B-scans
can only be displayed in the data logger if the B-scan is active.
To view a B-scan image
1.
290
Ensure that Corrosion Gage is on (see “Corrosion Module Activation and Setup”
on page 278).
Chapter 11
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
2.
Ensure that the B-scan is active (see “Activating the B-Scan” on page 286).
3.
View the Contents of the file ID with the saved B-scan (see “Viewing Setup and
Waveform Data for Saved IDs in a File” on page 199).
A vertical cursor on the B-scan image indicates the position of the saved
compressed A-scan. The vertical cursor is controlled by buttons that are displayed
above the parameter keys (P4 - P7) when a B-scan file is active (see Figure 11-47
on page 291):
Left arrow (P4 key)
Moves the vertical cursor one (1) increment to the left for review of individual
B-scan data points.
Right arrow (P5 key)
Moves the vertical cursor one (1) increment to the right for review of
individual B-scan data points.
Left double arrow (P6 key)
Moves the vertical cursor ten (10) increments to the left for rapid review of
individual B-scan data points.
Right double arrow (P7 key)
Moves the vertical cursor ten (10) increments to the right for rapid review of
individual B-scan data points.
Figure 11-47 B-scan display in the Data Logger
Software Features and Options
291
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
11.10 Template Storage
Template storage provides a means of making a reference template of a scan, then
comparing template to the live A-scan. This option can be very useful for spot weld
inspection, and also for condition monitoring over time.
As all of UT testing is in some way a comparative test, template storage can be used in
many different applications to compare known conditions to unknown samples.
To activate template storage
1.
Choose the Template menu item (group 4/5).
2.
Press Setup (P7 key) to display the Template setup page (see Figure 11-48 on
page 293).
3.
Press On (P2 key) to turn template storage on.
4.
Turn Gain to On if you want gain adjustments to be active.
5.
To name the template, press Edit and create a name.
6.
Press Add to add the name to the list.
7.
Repeat steps 5 and 6 to add more template names.
NOTE
The first five templates names are shown above the parameter keys (P1–P5).
8.
292
Press
Chapter 11
to return to the live screen.
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Figure 11-48 Template setup page
To store and activate a template
 With the Template menu active, press 2ND F, then select one of the templates (P1–
P5 keys) to store the template.
The template name is displayed with the symbol -A- below the name. This
indicates that the template is stored and active (see Figure 11-49 on page 294).
OR
1.
Press the right arrow(P6 key) to open the Template page.
2.
Select a template name, then press Store (P2 key).
3.
Press
to return to the live screen.
The template name is displayed with the symbol -A- below the name. This
indicates that the template is stored and active (see Figure 11-49 on page 294).
Opening the Template page to activate and store a template is necessary if the
template you want does not appear over any of the parameter keys. However, you
cannot see the live screen until after you store a template. You may have to store
again from the live screen (2ND F, (P1–P5) to get an accurate template image.
Software Features and Options
293
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
NOTE
When a template is stored, but not active, template name is displayed with a * symbol
below the name.
Figure 11-49 -A- indicates an active template
To display a stored template
 Press one of the parameter keys (P1–P5) that appears with a * symbol below the
template name (see Figure 11-50 on page 295).
OR
294
1.
Press the right arrow (P6 key) to open the Template page.
2.
Select a saved template (a * symbol appears to the right of the template name),
then press Load (P2 key).
Chapter 11
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Figure 11-50 Stored template display in live screen
To order and delete templates
1.
Choose Template > Setup to display the Template setup page (see Figure 11-51
on page 296).
2.
Press NEXT until Template Names is highlighted, then use the adjustment knob
or arrow keys to select a template.
3.
Use MoveUp (P1 key) or MoveDown (P2 key) to change the order of the selected
template.
4.
Use Delete (P3 key) to delete the selected template or Del All (P4 key) to delete all
the templates.
5.
Press
to return to the live screen.
Software Features and Options
295
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Figure 11-51 Template setup page
To customize the live A-scan display
296
1.
Choose Display Setup > Display Setup to display the Display setup page.
2.
In the Live A-Scan Display field:
•
Select Outline to display the live A-scan as an outline, and the template as
filled.
•
Select Filled to display the live A-scan as filled, and the template as an
outline.
Chapter 11
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
12. Maintenance and Troubleshooting
This chapter details the maintenance tasks to be performed on the EPOCH 650
ultrasonic flaw detector and provides a troubleshooting guide.
12.1 Replacing the Battery
The lithium-ion (Li-ion) battery is the primary method for powering the EPOCH 650
ultrasonic flaw detector. This battery comes installed in every instrument.
To replace the lithium-ion battery
1.
Turn off the EPOCH 650 and disconnect DC power.
2.
Fully unfold the pipe stand at the back of the instrument (see Figure 12-1 on
page 298).
3.
Loosen the two thumb screws securing the battery compartment cover and
remove the cover.
4.
Remove the used battery from the battery compartment.
5.
Ensure that the gasket around the battery compartment cover is clean and in good
condition.
6.
Install a new battery in the battery compartment.
Make sure the battery connectors align with the connectors in the battery
compartment.
7.
Install the battery compartment cover, making sure the tab on the cover fits the
slot on the bottom of the instrument.
8.
Tighten the two thumb screws on the cover.
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
297
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Pipe stand
Thumb screws
(2)
Battery
Battery
compartment
cover
Figure 12-1 Removing the lithium-ion battery
12.2 Instrument Cleaning
When needed, wash the instrument only with mild soap and water on a damp cloth.
12.3 Verifying O-Ring Gaskets and Seals
The EPOCH 650 ultrasonic flaw detector contains seals that are used to protect the
instrument’s internal hardware from the environment. These include:
•
Battery compartment cover seal
•
Side door seal
•
Membrane vent
•
Main o-ring seals between the top and bottom half of the instrument and the
aluminum heat-sink band
•
Conventional transducer gasket
Regularly clean and verify the state of the above seals and gaskets to ensure the
integrity of the hardware protection.
298
Chapter 12
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
12.4 Protecting the Display
EPOCH 650 ultrasonic flaw detector includes a clear-plastic sheet protecting the
display window. Leave the clear-plastic sheet in place when using the instrument to
continuously protect the display. Clear-plastic sheet replacements are available from
Olympus in packages of 10 (P/N: 600-DP [U8780297]).
The display window is permanently bonded to the upper-half of the instrument case
to fully seal the instrument. If the display window is damaged, the entire upper-half
of the instrument case and the direct-access keypad must be replaced.
12.5 Annual Calibration
Olympus recommends that you send your EPOCH 650 once a year to an Olympus
service center for annual calibration. Contact Olympus for details.
12.6 Troubleshooting
Symptom
The front panel keys appear to be frozen. The On/Off power key is the only
operational front panel key.
Possible cause
The All Lock function is active, locking all front panel keys.
Solution
Turn the instrument power Off and On to unlock the keys.
Maintenance and Troubleshooting
299
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Symptom
Several software functions are unavailable.
Possible cause
The Cal Lock function is active, locking all front panel keys.
Solution
Turn the instrument power Off and On to unlock the keys.
Symptom
The instrument does not start when pressing the On/Off power key (following a
software update).
Possible cause
Interrupted, incomplete, or corrupted software update.
Solution
300
1.
Remove the battery from the EPOCH 650 as well as the AC line power.
2.
Replace the battery in the EPOCH 650.
3.
Start the unit.
Chapter 12
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
13. Specifications
This chapter describes the EPOCH 650 ultrasonic flaw detector specifications.
13.1 General and Environmental Specifications
Table 15 General specifications
Parameter
Value
Overall dimensions
(W × H × D)
236 mm × 167 mm × 70 mm
(9.3 in. × 6.57 in. × 2.76 in.) (see on page 301)
Weight
1.6 kg (3.5 lb), including lithium-ion battery
Keypad
English, International, Japanese, Chinese
Languages
English, Spanish, French, German, Italian, Japanese,
Chinese, Russian, Portuguese
Transducer connections
BNC or LEMO 01
Data storage
Onboard up to 100,000 IDs with waveform, standard
2 GB microSD card (removable)
Battery type
Single lithium-ion rechargeable standard or standard AA
alkaline batteries
Battery life
12 hours
Power requirements
AC Mains: 100 VAC to 120 VAC, 200 VAC to 240 VAC,
50 Hz to 60 Hz
Display type
Full VGA (640 × 480 pixels) transflective color LCD,
60 Hz update rate
Display dimensions
(W × H, Diagonal)
132.5 mm × 99.4 mm, 165.1 mm
(5.2 in. × 3.9 in., 6.5 in.)
Warranty
1 year limited
Specifications
301
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Table 16 Environmental ratings specifications
Parameter
302
Value
IP rating
Designed to meet requirements of IP66 (knob
configuration) or IP67 (navigation pad configuration)
Explosive atmosphere
MIL-STD-810F Procedure 1, NFPA 70E, Section 500,
Class 1, Div. 2, Group D
Shock tested
IEC 60068-2-27, 60 g, 6 µs H.S., multiple axes, 18 total
Vibration tested
Sine vibration, IEC 60068-2-6, 50 Hz to 150 Hz at
0.762 mm. (0.03 in.). DA or 2 g, 20 sweep cycles
Operating temperature
–10 °C to 50 °C (–14 °F to 122 °F)
Battery storage temperature
0 °C to 50 °C (32 °F to 122 °F)
Chapter 13
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
13.2 Channel Specifications
Table 17 Pulser specifications
Parameter
Value
Pulser
Tunable Square Wave
PRF
10 Hz to 2000 Hz in 10 Hz increments
Energy settings
100 V, 200 V, 300 V, or 400 V
Pulse width
Adjustable from 20 to 10,000 ns (0.1 MHz) with
PerfectSquare Technology
Damping
50, 100, 200, 400 Ω
Table 18 Receiver specifications
Parameter
Value
Gain
0 dB to 110 dB
Maximum input signal
20 V p-p
Receiver input impedance
400 Ω ±5 %
Receiver bandwidth
0.2 to 26.5 MHz at –3 dB
Digital filter settings
30 digital filter sets standard
Seven EN12668-1:2010 compliant filters (0.2—10 MHz,
2.0—21.5 MHz, 8.0—26.5 MHz, 0.5—4 MHz, 0.2—
1.2 MHz, 1.5—8.5 MHz, 5—15 MHz)
Rectification
Fullwave, positive halfwave, negative halfwave, RF
System linearity
Horizontal: ±0.2 % FSW
Vertical Linearity
0.25 % FSH, amplifier accuracy ±1 dB
Reject
0 % to 80 % FSH with visual warning
Amplitude Measurement
0 % to 110 % full screen height with 0.25 % resolution
Measurement Rate
Equivalent to PRF in all modes
Table 19 Calibration specifications
Parameter
Value
Automated calibration
Velocity, zero offset
Straight beam (first backwall or echo-to-echo)
Angle beam (sound path or depth)
Test Modes
Pulse echo, dual, or through transmission
Units
Millimeters, inches, or microseconds
Specifications
303
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Table 19 Calibration specifications (continued)
Parameter
Value
Range
6.67 mm to 26,628 mm (0.262 in. to 1054.3 in.)
Velocity
635 m/s to 15240 m/s (0.0250 in./µsec to 0.6000 in/µsec)
Zero Offset
0 µsec to 750 µsec
Display Delay
–65.02 mm to 5,080.75 mm (–560 in. to 200.3 in.)
Refracted Angle
0° to 90° in 0.1° increments
Table 20 Gate specifications
Parameter
Value
Measurement gates
2 fully independent gates for amplitude and TOF
measurements
Gate start
Variable over entire displayed range
Gate width
Variable from gate start to end of displayed range
Gate height
Variable from 2 % to 95 % full screen height
Alarms
Positive and negative threshold, minimum depth (gate 1
and gate 2)
Table 21 Measurement specifications
Parameter
304
Value
Measurement display locations
5 locations available (manual or auto selection)
Gate 1
Thickness, sound path, projection, depth, amplitude,
time-of-flight, min/max depth, min/max amplitude
Gate 2
Same as Gate 1
Echo-to-Echo
Standard Gate2—Gate1
Other Measurements
Overshoot (dB) value for DGS/AVG, ERS (equivalent
reflector size) for DGS/AVG, AWS D1.1/D1.5 A, B, C and
D values, reject value, Echo to Ref dB values
DAC/TCG
Standard
DAC Points
Up to 50 points, 110 dB dynamic range
Special DAC Modes
20–80 % DAC, custom DAC (up to 6 curves)
Curved Surface Correction
Standard OD or bar correction for angle beam
measurements
Chapter 13
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
13.3 Input/Output Specifications
Table 22 on page 305 provides the specifications for the input output signals.
Table 22 Input/output specifications
Parameter
Value
USB ports
1 USB On-The-Go (OTG)
Video output
VGA output standard
RS-232
Yes
Analog outputs
1 analog output, selectable 1 V/10 V full scale, 4 mA max.
(optional)
Alarm outputs
3 alarm outputs, 5 V TTL, 10 mA
Trigger I/O
Trigger input, 5V TTL;
Trigger output, 5V TTL, 10mA max
Encoder Inputs
1-axis encoder line (quadrature - Corrosion Module only)
Table 23 on page 305 describes all the connections available on the Digital Out 15-pin
D-sub connector. Table 24 on page 306 describes all the connections available on the
VGA Out 15-pin connector.
Table 23 EPOCH 650 15-pin digital port output
Pin
Signal
1
ALARM GATE2
2
TRIG OUT
Trigger Sync Output
3
RS232 TXD
Transmit Data (Serial)
4
RS232 RTC DTR
5
RS232 RXD
6
RS232 CTS DSR
7
GND
Description
Gate 2 Alarm
Data Terminal Ready (Serial)
Receive Data (Serial)
Data Set Ready (Serial)
Ground
8
+5V
9
BSCAN INT X
X-Axis Encoder Increment
BSCAN DIR X
X-Axis Encoder Direction
GND
+5 V voltage
Ground
Specifications
305
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Table 23 EPOCH 650 15-pin digital port output (continued)
Pin
Signal
Description
ALARM GATE 1
Gate 1 Alarm
TRIG IN Trigger
Sync Input
ALARM GATE IF
Interface Gate Alarm
EXT BEEPER
External Beeper (PWM)
Table 24 EPOCH 650 15-pin VGA port outputa
Pin
a.
306
Signal
Description
1
VGA_RED
2
VGA_GREEN
VGA green output
VGA red output
3
VGA_BLUE
VGA blue output
4
NC
5
GND
Ground
6
GND
Ground
7
GND
Ground
8
GND
Ground
Not connected
9
NC
10
GND
Not connected
11
NC
Not connected
12
NC
Not connected
Ground
13
LCD_HSYNC
Horizontal sync.
14
LCD_VSYNC
Vertical sync.
15
NC
Not connected
Standard VGA output configuration
Chapter 13
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Appendix A: Sound Velocities
Table 25 on page 307 lists the ultrasonic velocity in a variety of common materials.
This is only a guide. The actual velocity in these materials might vary significantly
due to a variety of causes, such as, composition, preferred crystallographic
orientation, porosity, and temperature. For maximum accuracy, establish the sound
velocity in a given material by first testing a sample of the material.
Table 25 Ultrasonic velocities in a variety of common materials
Material
V (in./µs)
V (m/s)
Acrylic resin (Perspex)
0.107
2730
Aluminum
0.249
6320
Beryllium
0.508
12900
Brass, naval
0.174
4430
Copper
0.183
4660
Diamond
0.709
18000
Glycerin
0.076
1920
Inconel
0.229
5820
Iron, Cast (slow)
0.138
3500
Iron, Cast (fast)
0.220
5600
Iron oxide (magnetite)
0.232
5890
Lead
®
0.085
2160
®
0.106
2680
Molybdenum
0.246
6250
Motor oil (SAE 20/30)
0.069
1740
Lucite
Sound Velocities
307
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Table 25 Ultrasonic velocities in a variety of common materials (continued)
Material
V (in./µs)
V (m/s)
Nickel, pure
0.222
5630
Polyamide (slow)
0.087
2200
Nylon, fast
0.102
2600
Polyethylene, high density (HDPE)
0.097
2460
Polyethylene, low density (LDPE)
0.082
2080
Polystyrene
0.092
2340
Polyvinylchloride, (PVC, hard)
0.094
2395
Rubber (polybutadiene)
0.063
1610
Silicon
0.379
9620
Silicone
0.058
1485
Steel, 1020
0.232
5890
Steel, 4340
0.230
5850
Steel, 302 austenitic stainless
0.223
5660
Steel, 347 austenitic stainless
0.226
5740
Tin
0.131
3320
Titanium, Ti 150A
0.240
6100
Tungsten
0.204
5180
Water (20°C)
0.0580
1480
Zinc
0.164
4170
Zirconium
0.183
4650
References
308
1.
Folds, D. L. “Experimental Determination of Ultrasonic Wave Velocities in
Plastics, Elastomers, and Syntactic Foam as a Function of Temperature.” Naval
Research and Development Laboratory. Panama City, Florida, 1971.
2.
Fredericks, J. R. Ultrasonic Engineering. New York: John Wiley & Sons, Inc., 1965.
3.
Handbook of Chemistry and Physics. Cleveland, Ohio: Chemical Rubber Co., 1963.
4.
Mason, W. P. Physical Acoustics and the Properties of Solids. New York: D.Van
Nostrand Co., 1958.
5.
Papadakis, E. P. Panametrics - unpublished notes, 1972.
Appendix A
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Appendix B: Data File Types
EPOCH 650 ultrasonic flaw detectors enable you to create several file types based on
application requirements. There are two standard file types, calibration and
incremental, and advanced file types for corrosion-style data logging.
B.1
Calibration file type
A calibration (CAL) file is designed specifically for storing calibration setups.
Calibration files have space to store one single ID with its corresponding waveform
and data. Separate calibration files are created for the different transducers, materials,
or test parts being used. The advantage to storing setup data in calibration files is that
the data can be quickly recalled to the live screen using the Quick Recall parameter.
B.2
Incremental file type
Incremental (INC) files are designed for general inspection data storage, and can
contain more than one ID for storing file data. Each time the file is saved, the ID
increments using the following incrementing rules:
•
Only the portion of an ID number that consists of digits and letters (no
punctuation marks), beginning with the right-most character and extending
leftward to the first punctuation mark or to the left-most character (whichever
comes first), can increment.
•
Digits are cycled 0, 1, 2,..., 9, 0, and so on. The 9 to 0 transition is done only after
incrementing the character to the left. Letters are cycled A, B, C,..., Z, A, and so on.
The Z to A transition is done only after incrementing the character to the left. In
either case, if there is no character to the left or if the character to the left is a
punctuation mark, then the ID number cannot increment.
Data File Types
309
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
•
If an ID number cannot increment, then after a measurement reading is saved, an
error beep sounds, and the momentary message “Cannot Increment ID” is shown
on the display above the function keys. Subsequent saves overwrite measurement
readings if you do not manually change the ID number first.
See “Example of automatically generated incremented ID number series” on
page 311.
310
Appendix B
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Example of automatically generated incremented ID number series
1.
Initial
Limit
2.
Initial
Limit
3.
Initial
Limit
4.
Initial
Limit
1
2
3
.
.
.
9
ABC
ABD
ABE
.
.
.
ABZ
ACA
ACB
.
.
.
ZZZ
ABC*12*34
ABC*12*35
ABC*12*36
.
.
.
ABC*12*99
0001
0002
0003
.
.
.
0009
0010
.
.
.
9999
Data File Types
311
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
5.
Initial
Limit
B.3
1A
1B
1C
.
.
.
1Z
2A
2B
.
.
.
9Z
Advanced File Types
The EPOCH 650 features a full corrosion-style data logger with its advanced file
types. These files have specific configurations of IDs, which are designed for use in
many corrosion applications.
B.3.1
Sequential
A sequential (SEQ) file is defined by a starting and an ending ID number. The
resulting file includes the starting and ending points and all points in between (see
Table 26 on page 312 and Table 27 on page 313).
Table 26 Example of start ID# = ABC123
Start ID# = ABC123
End ID# = ABC135
Resulting file would contain the
following list of ID numbers:
ABC123
ABC124
ABC125
.
.
.
ABC135
312
Appendix B
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Table 27 Example of start ID# = XY-GY
Start ID# = XY-GY
End ID# = XY-IB
Resulting file would contain the
following list of ID numbers:
XY-GY
XY-GZ
XY-HA
.
.
.
XY-IB
A sequential file with custom points (SEQ + CPT) is defined by a starting and ending
ID number plus a series of custom points. The resulting file includes the starting and
ending points and all points in between. In addition, multiple measurements per ID
number location are assigned using the custom points. You can enter up to 20 custom
points. The total number of characters of an ID with custom points is 19.
The following example describes measurements along a pipe or tube where at each ID
number location you can take a measurement at the top, bottom, left, and right of the
pipe (see Table 28 on page 313).
Table 28 Example of starting ID# = XYZ1267
Starting ID# = XYZ1267
Ending ID# = XYZ1393
Custom Points = TOP
BOTTOM
LEFT
RIGHT
Resulting file would contain the following
list of ID numbers:
XYZ1267TOP
XYZ1267BOTTOM
XYZ1267LEFT
XYZ1267RIGHT
XYZ1268TOP
XYZ1268BOTTOM
XYZ1268LEFT
.
.
.
XYZ1393RIGHT
Data File Types
313
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
B.3.2
2-D Matrix Grid
A two dimensional (2D) file sequence begins with the ID number that refers to the
first column and the first row. Then the column (or row) increments one value at a
time until the sequence reaches the last column (or row) value while the other
dimension stays constant. At this point, the other dimension increases from its first to
its next value. This continues until the ID number that refers to the last column and
last row is reached. Either the columns or the rows can be selected to increment first
(see Figure 13-1 on page 314).
Figure 13-1 2-D matrix grid
How is a grid used? A grid structure may associate one dimension of the grid (for
example, the columns) with the physical parts whose wall thickness is to be
measured. The particular measurement points on each part are then associated with
the other dimension of the grid (for example, the rows). See Figure 13-2 on page 315.
314
Appendix B
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Measurement location
ID number
Row
Column
Figure 13-2 One grid for 75 identical parts
Alternatively, the rows and columns of a grid can refer to a 2-D map of measurement
points on the surface of one part. In this case, a different grid is made for each part
(see Figure 13-3 on page 316).
Data File Types
315
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Name: Elbow
Rows: 01 through 10
Columns: A through E
ID’s: Elbow/A0 through Elbow/E10
Name: Tee
Rows: 1 through 4
Columns: 1 through 3
ID’s: Tee/11 through Tee/34
Figure 13-3 Different named grid for each part
316
Appendix B
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
B.3.3
2-D EPRI
The 2-D EPRI file (2DEPR) is the same as the standard 2-D grid file type except for a
minor change in the way alpha characters increment:
•
Standard 2-D grid file: Refers to the standard incrementing columns that start at
A and extend past Z. (Example: Start Column: A; End Column: AD; Column
Result: A, B, C...X, Y, Z, AA, AB, AC, AD.)
•
EPRI 2-D grid file: Refers to custom incrementing columns that start at A and
extend past Z. (Example: Start Column: A; End Column: CC; Column Result: A, B,
C...Z, AA, BB, CC.)
B.3.4
2-D Matrix Grid with Custom Point
A 2-D matrix grid with custom points (2D + CPT) file is the same as a standard 2-D
grid file with the addition of custom points. Custom points allow multiple readings
per grid ID number to be assigned (see Table 29 on page 317).
Table 29 Example of 2-D matrix grid with custom point
Start Column A
End Column J (Start Grid Coordinate = A01)
Start Row 01
End Row 17 (End Grid Coordinate = J17)
Custom Points = LEFT
CENTER
RIGHT
Resulting file would contain the following
list of ID Numbers:
A01LEFT
A01CENTER
A01RIGHT
A02LEFT
.
.
.
J17RIGHT
Data File Types
317
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
B.3.5
3-D Matrix Grid
A three-dimensional (3D) grid file sequence begins with the ID number that refers to
the first column, the first row, and the first point. Then the point (or column, or row)
increments one value at a time until the sequence reaches the last point (or column, or
row) value while the other two dimension values stay constant. Then, another
dimension increments from its first to its next value. This continues until the ID
number that refers to the last column, last row and last point is reached. You can select
either columns, rows, or points to increment first and one of the remaining two
selections to increment second.
How is a 3-D grid used? A 3-D grid structure may associate two dimensions of the
grid (for example, the columns and rows) with the physical coordinates on the part
whose wall thickness is to be measured. The particular measurement points on each
part are then associated with the third dimension of the grid. This scenario enables
multiple readings to be stored at each grid coordinate (see Table 30 on page 318).
Table 30 Example of 3-D grid
Start Col =
End Col = F
Start Row =
End Row = 4
Start Point
End Point =
A
1
= X
Z
Resulting file would contain the following
list of ID numbers:
A1X
A1Y
A1Z
A2X
.
.
.
A4Z
B1X
B1Y
.
.
.
F4Z
318
Appendix B
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
B.3.6
Boiler
A boiler (BOILER) file is a special file type designed specifically for boiler
applications. A common method for identifying a thickness measurement location is
by a 3-D approach. The first dimension is Elevation, which refers to the physical
distance from the bottom to the top of the boiler. The second dimension is Tube
Number, which refers to the number of boiler tubes that need inspection. The third
dimension is the Custom Point, which refers to the actual thickness reading location at
the specified elevation on the specified tube. When these three dimensions are
combined, a single ID number is formed to precisely identify the exact location of
each thickness reading (see Table 31 on page 319).
Table 31 Example of a BOILER file
Elevations = 10ft-, 20ft-, 45ft-. 100ftStart Tube = 01
End Tube = 73
Custom Points = L,C, R (left, center, right)
The resulting file would contain the following list of ID numbers:
10ft-01L
10ft-01C
10ft-01R
10ft-02L
.
.
.
10ft-73R
20ft-10L
.
.
.
100ft-73C
100ft-73R
(This example assumes that you have chosen to increment the custom
points first, tube number second, and elevation third. You can
choose alternate incrementing methods.)
Data File Types
319
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
320
Appendix B
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Appendix C: Glossary
Table 32 Glossary
Term
Definition
Acoustic impedance
A material property defined as the product of sound
velocity (C) and material density (d).
Acoustic interface
The boundary between two media of different acoustic
impedance.
Acoustic velocity
The speed of sound in a test material. Different wave
modes such as longitudinal and shear will have different
velocities.
Amplifier
An electronic device that increases the strength of a signal
fed into it by obtaining power from a source other than the
input signal.
Amplitude
The height of an indication on a waveform display,
measured from the lowest to the highest point on the
indication. This corresponds to relative signal strength
and is often referred to as %FSH (percent full screen
height).
Analog output
A data output format consisting of a DC voltage whose
amplitude corresponds to a measured parameter such as
echo amplitude or depth.
Angle beam
transducer
A transducer that transmits or receives the acoustic energy
at an angle to the surface to generate refracted shear waves
or surface waves in the part being inspected.
Glossary
321
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Table 32 Glossary (continued)
Term
322
Definition
A-scan
The most common waveform display format, plotting
signal amplitude versus distance. An A-Scan shows the
pulse travel time in the horizontal direction (left to right),
representing the corresponding sound paths, and the echo
amplitude in the vertical direction.
Attenuation
The loss in acoustic energy that occurs between any two
points of travel. This loss may be due to absorption,
reflection, scattering, and other phenomena.
Backwall echo
The echo received from the side of the test piece opposite
the side to which the transducer is coupled. This echo
represents the thickness of the test piece at that point.
Background noise
Extraneous signals caused by sources within the ultrasonic
testing system and/or the material being tested.
Beam-index point
(BIP)
For an angle beam probe, the point where the sound
leaves the wedge and enters the specimen.
Cal. block velocity
Material sound velocity for the calibration block.
Couplant
A material (usually a liquid or gel) used between the
transducer and the test piece to eliminate air from this
space and facilitate the passage of sound waves into and
out of the specimen.
Critical defect
Either the largest tolerable defect or the smallest
intolerable defect. The critical defect size is usually given
by a specification or code.
Cross talk
An unwanted condition affecting dual element
transducers in which acoustic energy travels from the
transmitting crystal to the receiving crystal by routes other
than the intended path through the test piece.
Damping (control)
A variable resistance across the pulser circuit output
which shapes the excitation pulse. Typically it is used to
change pulse characteristics to optimize either penetration
(low damping) or near-surface resolution (high damping).
Appendix C
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Table 32 Glossary (continued)
Term
Definition
Damping material
Any epoxy or other high attenuation material used in the
transducer to shorten the ringing time of the piezoelectric
element.
Decibel (dB)
A unit which compares levels of power, commonly used to
express relative sound intensities in ultrasonic testing.
Two amplitude levels V1 and V2, expressed as either
voltages or screen percentages, are said to differ by n
decibels where:
dB = 20 log (V2 / V1)
Delay control
Software function that introduces an adjustable time
period between the excitation pulse and the start of the
sweep across the data display.
Detectability
The ability of a test system (instrument and transducer) to
detect or “see” a given size reflector.
Distance amplitude
correction (DAC)
A method of flaw sizing that plots an on-screen curve
representing the echo amplitude from a known size
reflector at varying distances from the transducer. This
curve compensates for the loss of energy due to beam
spreading and attenuation.
Distance Gain Sizing
(DGS)
A sizing technique that mathematically relates the
amplitude of the echo from a reflector to that of a flat
bottom hold at the same depth or distance. The generated
curves are derived from the calculated beam spreading
pattern of a given transducer, based on its frequency and
element diameter, and adjusted for material attenuation.
Dual element probe
A transduced containing two piezoelectric elements, one
which transmits and one which receives.
Dynamic range
The range of gain or signal amplitude that can be
displayed on a given instrument.
Glossary
323
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Table 32 Glossary (continued)
Term
Definition
Excitation pulse
The pulse of electrical energy sent by the pulser to the
transducer, sometimes known informally as the main
bang. Both spike (broadband) and square wave (tuned)
excitation pulses are commonly used.
Filter
Receiver function that passes selected frequency
components of a signal and rejects others, used to improve
signal-to-noise, near surface resolution, and dynamic
range. Filters may be high pass, low pass, narrowband, or
broadband.
First critical angle
In angle beam or immersion testing, the minimum
incident angle in the wedge or water path at which the
refracted longitudinal wave disappears from the test piece.
Flaw
A discontinuity that may be undesirable but does not
necessarily call for rejection, depending on procedural
requirements.
Frequency
The number of complete cycles per second undergone or
produced by an oscillating as body expressed the
reciprocal of the period t.
f = 1/t
Gain
Used in electronics with reference to an increase in signal
power; usually expressed as the ratio of the output power
to the input power in decibels.
Gate
A software function that selects and marks a portion of the
displayed range for measurement of distance or
amplitude.
Hertz (Hz)
The unit of frequency, defined as the frequency of a
periodic phenomenon of which the period is one second;
equal to one cycle per second.
1 kilohertz (kHz) = 103 cycles per second
1 megahertz (MHz) = 106 cycles per second.
324
Appendix C
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Table 32 Glossary (continued)
Term
Definition
Immersion testing
A test method in which a water bath or a water column is
used to couple sound energy from the transducer to the
test piece. It is commonly used in automated scanning
applications.
Incidence, angle of
The angle between a sound beam striking an acoustic
interface and the normal (perpendicular) orientation to the
surface at that point. Usually designated by the Greek
symbol α (alpha).
Indication
A displayed signal signifying the presence of a sound
wave reflector.
Indication (defect)
level
The amount of gain which must be added to an
instrument setup to bring an indication (defect) echo
signal to peak at a selected reference level.
Leg
In angle beam testing, the path the shear wave travels in a
straight line before being reflected by the opposite surface
of the material being tested.
Linearity, vertical or
amplitude
The degree to which an ultrasonic instrument responds in
a proportional manner to a range of echo amplitudes
produced by specified reflectors.
Linearity, horizontal
or distance
The degree to which an ultrasonic instrument responds in
a proportional manner to a range of echo signals produced
by specified reflectors at different points in time.
LOS
Acronym for loss of signal.
Longitudinal wave
Mode of wave propagation characterized by particle
movement parallel to the direction of wave travel.
Main bang
Informal term for excitation pulse.
Mode conversion
The change of a portion of sound beam energy into a wave
of a different mode due to refraction at incident angles
other than zero degrees. In NDT, this usually involves
conversion of longitudinal waves into shear waves or
surface waves.
Glossary
325
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Table 32 Glossary (continued)
Term
326
Definition
Peaking Memory
A software function that records an echo envelope as the
transducer scans across a test piece by capturing and
storing on the screen the peak echo amplitude at each
pixel location
Peaking up
Maximizing the height of a displayed indication by
optimizing the position of the sound beam.
Penetration
The ability of the test system to overcome signal
amplitude loss across a sound path due to factors like
attenuation, scattering, and beam spreading.
Piezoelectric
materials
A family of materials (such as quartz, lead metaniobate
and lead zirconium titanate) that possess the characteristic
ability to produce a voltage differential across their faces
when deformed by an externally applied mechanical force,
and a change in their own physical configuration
(dimensions) when an external voltage is applied to them.
Pitch-catch
A test method which utilizes separate transmitting and
receiving transducers on the same side of the test piece.
Probe
In ultrasonic testing, an alternate name for transducer.
Pulse repetition
frequency (PRF)
The frequency at which an instrument generates an
excitation pulse and initiates a data acquisition cycle. Also
known as Pulse Repetition Rate.
Range
The total distance represented by the horizontal display
axis.
Receiver
The circuits a flaw detector that receive and process
returning echoes (as voltages) from the transducer. Typical
signal processing includes amplification, filtering, and
rectification.
Appendix C
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Table 32 Glossary (continued)
Term
Definition
Rectification
Receiver function that selects display of waveforms as an
RF signal with both positive and negative deflections, a
full wave rectified signal in which all deflections are
displayed as positive, or half wave negative and positive
in which only one side of the RF signal is displayed as a
positive deflection.
Reference echo
The echo from a specified reference reflector.
Reference gain
(reference level)
A gain level established by a test procedure, commonly by
setting a reference reflector echo to a specified height.
Reference line
A designated percentage of total screen height at which
reference echoes and indication echoes are compared.
Reference reflector
A reflector of known size and geometry at a known
distance, such as a flat bottom hole.
Refraction, angle of
The angle with respect to perpendicular of the sound
beam in the test material, generated by refraction from the
angle of incidence in the wedge.
Reject (control)
Also known as suppression, this limits the input
sensitivity of the amplifier in the receiver to display only
indications greater than a selected height. It is used to
reduce or eliminate “grass” or scattering noise from the
display.
Resolution
The ability of the test system (instrument and transducer)
to distinguish between two reflectors at slightly different
depths, or within a given distance of the surface of the test
piece.
Scanning gain
The amount of gain above the reference level added per
procedure to optimize visibility of indications.
Second critical angle
In angle beam or immersion testing, the minimum
incident angle in the wedge or water path at which the
refracted shear wave disappears from the test piece.
Glossary
327
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Table 32 Glossary (continued)
Term
328
Definition
Sensitivity
The ability of the test system (instrument and transducer)
to detect a given size reflector at a given distance.
Signal-to-noise ratio
The amplitude ratio between the echo from a given
indication and background indications such as grain
scattering or instrument noise.
Single element probe
A transducer containing only one piezoelectric element,
which is used to both transmit and receive sound.
Skip-distance
In angle beam testing, the surface distance which
represents one V-path of sound in the material.
Sound beam
The characteristic shape of the ultrasonic wave in a test
piece.
Sound path distance
The distance between the transducer and a reflector. In
angle beam and immersion testing, this is commonly
measured from the point at which sound enters the test
piece. This is sometimes referred to as angular distance in
angle beam testing.
Straight beam probe
(Normal beam probe)
A transducer that transmits sound into the test piece
perpendicular to the entry surface.
Surface wave
A mode of wave propagation characterized by an elliptical
movement of the particles on the surface of the specimen
as the wave front moves forward, penetrating the
specimen to a depth of one wavelength.
Through
transmission
A test method in which the pulses from a transmitting
transducer are received by a second transducer on the
opposite side of the test piece.
Time-corrected gain
(TCG)
A software function that adjusts instrument gain so
that the echo amplitude of a given size reflector is
displayed at a constant display height regardless of
the distance to that given size reflector.
Transducer
A device that transforms one form of energy into another.
Appendix C
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Table 32 Glossary (continued)
Term
Definition
Transmitter
Circuit of the flaw detector that sends the initial pulse
voltage to the transducer.
Ultrasonic
Frequencies above the human audible range
(above 20 kHz).
V-path
The angular distance sound travels, measured from the
top surface of the material to the bottom, and reflecting
back up to the top surface.
Wavelength
The distance between like points on successive wave
fronts; such as the distance between any two successive
particles of the oscillating medium that are in the same
phase. It is denoted by the Greek letter λ (lambda).
Zero offset
A time offset between the moment the excitation pulse is
generated and the point at which the screen display and
measurement begins, typically used to subtract transit
time through a wedge, delay line, or wear plate from a
depth or distance measurement.
Glossary
329
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
330
Appendix C
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Appendix D: Parts List
.
Table 33 EPOCH 650 basic kit (spares can be purchased)
Part Number
U8 Number
Description
EP600-BA-UEE-K
U8051216
EPOCH 650 instrument
NOTE: The part number vary according
to the instrument configuration. The
instrument can be adapted to have
different keypads, manual languages,
power cords, etc. Contact your Olympus
representative for further information.
EP-MCA-X
See note
AC charger/adaptor
NOTE: The part number vary according
to the instrument configuration. You must
specify the power cord type.
600-BAT-L
U8760056
EPOCH 650 lithium-ion rechargeable
battery
600-TC
U8780294
EPOCH 650 instrument transport case
EP650-MANUAL-CD
Q7780010
EPOCH 650 User’s Manual (CD-Rom)
DMTA-10056-01EN
Q7780001
EPOCH 650 Getting Started Guide
MICROSD-ADP-2GB
U8779307
2 GB microSD memory card with
adaptors
Parts List
331
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Table 34 EPOCH 650 software options
Part Number
U8 Number
Description
EP600-DGS-AVG
U8140146
EPOCH 650 onboard DGS/AVG
software option
EP600-AWS
U8140147
EPOCH 650 AWS D1.1/D1.5 software
option
EP600-TEMPLATE
U8140148
EPOCH 600 template storage software
option
EP600-API5UE
U8140149
EPOCH 600 API 5UE software option
EP600-XDATA
U8140150
EPOCH 600 expanded data logger
software option
EP600-AVERAGE
U8140151
EPOCH 600 waveform averaging
software option
GAGEVIEWPRO
U8140075
GageView Pro PC interface software
GAGEVIEWPROKIT-USB-A-AB
U8140076
GageView Pro PC interface software
with USB A-AB cable, 6 feet
Table 35 EPOCH 650 optional accessories
Part Number
332
U8 Number
Description
EPXT-EC-X
See note
EPOCH external charger
NOTE: The part number vary
according to the instrument
configuration. You must specify the
power cord type.
600-STAND
U8780296
EPOCH 650 pipe stand assembly
EP4/CH
U8140055
EPOCH Series chest harness
600-DP
U8780297
EPOCH 650 display protectors (pack
of 10)
Appendix D
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Table 35 EPOCH 650 optional accessories (continued)
Part Number
U8 Number
Description
EPLTC-C-USB-A-6
U8840031
EPOCH LTC USB communication
cable (mini-AB to TYPE-A/HOST)
EPLTC-C-USB-B-6
U8840033
EPOCH LTC USB communication
cable (mini-AB to TYPE-B/CLIENT)
600-C-VGA-5
U8780298
5-feet EPOCH 600 VGA cable
(1.5 meter)
EP1000-C-9OUT-6
U8779017
6-feet standard 9-pin communication
cable (1.8 meter)
600-C-RS232-5
U8780299
5-feet EPOCH 600 RS-232 cable
(1.5 meter)
EP600WARRANTY
U8780300
EPOCH 650 extended warranty
(1 additional year)
Parts List
333
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
334
Appendix D
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
List of Figures
Figure i-1
Figure i-2
Figure i-3
Figure i-4
Figure 1-1
Figure 1-2
Figure 1-3
Figure 1-4
Figure 1-5
Figure 1-6
Figure 1-7
Figure 1-8
Figure 1-9
Figure 1-10
Figure 1-11
Figure 1-12
Figure 1-13
Figure 1-14
Figure 1-15
Figure 1-16
Figure 1-17
Figure 1-18
Figure 1-19
Figure 1-20
Figure 1-21
Figure 2-1
Figure 2-2
Figure 2-3
Figure 2-4
Figure 3-1
Labels location ...................................................................................................... 1
Location of the serial number ............................................................................ 2
Warning symbol ................................................................................................... 2
Transport case contents ..................................................................................... 17
EPOCH 650 front view ...................................................................................... 19
EPOCH 650 rear view ....................................................................................... 20
The EPOCH 650 — Adjustment knob configuration ................................... 21
The EPOCH 650 — Navigation pad configuration ...................................... 21
Coarse (left) and fine (right) adjustment selection ....................................... 22
The EPOCH 650 — Adjustment knob configuration ................................... 23
Knob configuration (English and international versions) ........................... 24
Knob configuration (Chinese and Japanese versions) ................................. 25
The EPOCH 650 — Navigation pad configuration ...................................... 26
Pad configuration (English and international versions) .............................. 27
Pad configuration (Chinese and Japanese versions) .................................... 28
Function and parameter keys .......................................................................... 31
Menu system software buttons ........................................................................ 32
AC charger/adaptor power indicator ............................................................. 32
Alarm indicators ................................................................................................ 33
Location of the transducer connectors ............................................................ 34
The RS-232/Alarms and VGA Out connectors .............................................. 37
The connectors behind the protective cover .................................................. 38
Installing the microSD card .............................................................................. 39
The battery compartment ................................................................................. 40
Instrument resting on stand ............................................................................. 41
Location of the EPOCH 650 power key and indicator ................................. 43
Connecting the charger/adaptor ...................................................................... 46
Connecting the DC power plug ....................................................................... 46
Front panel AC charger/adaptor power indicator ........................................ 47
Software main display elements ...................................................................... 49
List of Figures
335
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Figure 3-2
Figure 3-3
Figure 3-4
Figure 3-5
Figure 3-6
Figure 3-7
Figure 3-8
Figure 3-9
Figure 3-10
Figure 3-11
Figure 3-12
Figure 3-13
Figure 3-14
Figure 3-15
Figure 3-16
Figure 3-17
Figure 3-18
Figure 3-19
Figure 3-20
Figure 3-21
Figure 4-1
Figure 4-2
Figure 4-3
Figure 4-4
Figure 4-5
Figure 4-6
Figure 4-7
Figure 4-8
Figure 4-9
Figure 4-10
Figure 4-11
Figure 4-12
Figure 4-13
Figure 4-14
Figure 4-15
Figure 4-16
Figure 4-17
Figure 4-18
Figure 4-19
Figure 4-20
Figure 6-1
Figure 6-2
336
The menu groups and their level numbers .................................................... 50
F1 key selecting the Basic function .................................................................. 50
The focus is on the selected parameter (green) ............................................. 51
P3 key selecting the Range parameter ............................................................ 52
Adjustment knob configuration — Lock key ................................................ 54
The AUTO XX% feature: inactive (left) and active (right) ........................... 54
The reference and scanning gains ................................................................... 56
The Gate 1 start position adjustment .............................................................. 58
Trigger in Edge and Peak modes ..................................................................... 60
Trigger in 1stPeak, and J-Flank modes ........................................................... 61
Gate 1 and gate 2 alarm indicator lights ......................................................... 61
The Auto Cal menu ........................................................................................... 63
The Cal-Zero value ............................................................................................ 64
The gate 1 start ................................................................................................... 65
The Velocity Cal value ....................................................................................... 66
The Range value ................................................................................................. 66
Reference gain setting ....................................................................................... 67
The Create screen with virtual keypad ........................................................... 69
The Save dialog box ........................................................................................... 70
The Resets page .................................................................................................. 71
Software main display elements ...................................................................... 73
Software display elements in full screen mode ............................................. 74
File identifier bar with ID example ................................................................. 75
Message bar with a message example ............................................................ 75
Example of the Gain, Range, and Delay direct-access parameters ............. 76
Direct access preset values ............................................................................... 77
Example of measurement reading boxes with their icons ........................... 77
Example of an A-scan waveform with gates ................................................. 78
The area displaying flags .................................................................................. 79
Standard menu groups ..................................................................................... 83
The Display setup page and its elements ....................................................... 87
The Edit page with its virtual keyboard ......................................................... 88
The Display setup page ..................................................................................... 89
The Reading setup page .................................................................................... 91
Example of measurement reading boxes with icons .................................... 92
The General Setup page .................................................................................... 96
The Status setup page ....................................................................................... 98
The Clock setup page ........................................................................................ 99
Misc setup page ................................................................................................ 102
Editable Parameters setup page ..................................................................... 103
Horizontal line indicating the reject level .................................................... 116
Peak memory signal envelope example ....................................................... 117
List of Figures
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Figure 6-3
Figure 6-4
Figure 6-5
Figure 7-1
Figure 7-2
Figure 7-3
Figure 7-4
Figure 7-5
Figure 7-6
Figure 7-7
Figure 7-8
Figure 7-9
Figure 8-1
Figure 9-1
Figure 9-2
Figure 9-3
Figure 9-4
Figure 9-5
Figure 9-6
Figure 9-7
Figure 9-8
Figure 9-9
Figure 9-10
Figure 9-11
Figure 9-12
Figure 9-13
Figure 9-14
Figure 9-15
Figure 9-16
Figure 9-17
Figure 9-18
Figure 9-19
Figure 9-20
Figure 9-21
Figure 9-22
Figure 9-23
Figure 9-24
Figure 9-25
Figure 9-26
Figure 9-27
Figure 9-28
Figure 9-29
Selecting the x-axis grid mode .......................................................................
The x-axis grid modes .....................................................................................
The y-axis grid modes: 100 % (left), 110 % (right) ......................................
Gate 1 and gate 2 (with echo-to-echo turned on) ........................................
The Gate 1 menu ..............................................................................................
The direct-access gate parameter box ...........................................................
The Gate Setup menu ......................................................................................
Trigger indicator on gate in Edge and Peak modes ....................................
Trigger indicator on gate in 1stPeak, and J-Flank modes ..........................
Echo-to-echo measurement example ............................................................
Gate tick marks indicating alarm threshold type .......................................
Minimum depth alarm marker ......................................................................
The A-Out setup page .....................................................................................
Example of a gated signal for zero calibration ............................................
Entering the Zero Cal thickness value ..........................................................
Example of a gated signal for velocity calibration ......................................
Entering the Velocity Cal thickness value ....................................................
Adjusting zero offset for the first delay line echo .......................................
Example of a gated signal for zero calibration ............................................
Entering the Zero Cal thickness value ..........................................................
Example of a gated signal for velocity calibration ......................................
Entering the Velocity Cal thickness value ....................................................
Example of a gated signal for zero calibration ............................................
Entering the Zero Cal thickness value ..........................................................
Example of a gated signal for velocity calibration ......................................
Entering the Velocity Cal thickness value ....................................................
Example of gated signals for velocity calibration .......................................
Entering the Velocity Cal thickness value ....................................................
IIW block with probe at 0 mark .....................................................................
Using the Peak Memory feature to find the BIP .........................................
The IIW block with probe at the 45° mark ...................................................
Verifying the refracted angle ..........................................................................
Example of a gated signal for zero calibration ............................................
Entering the Zero Cal thickness value ..........................................................
Example of a gated signal for velocity calibration ......................................
Entering the Velocity Cal thickness value ....................................................
The IIW block with probe facing sensitivity hole .......................................
Setting the reference gain ...............................................................................
Example of a gated signal for zero calibration ............................................
Entering the Zero Cal thickness value ..........................................................
Example of a gated signal for velocity calibration ......................................
Entering the Velocity Cal thickness value ....................................................
List of Figures
120
121
122
123
124
125
127
128
129
131
134
135
141
147
148
149
150
152
153
154
155
156
158
159
160
161
163
164
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
177
178
179
180
337
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Figure 9-30
Figure 9-31
Figure 9-32
Figure 9-33
Figure 9-34
Figure 9-35
Figure 9-36
Figure 10-1
Figure 10-2
Figure 10-3
Figure 10-4
Figure 10-5
Figure 10-6
Figure 10-7
Figure 10-8
Figure 10-9
Figure 10-10
Figure 10-11
Figure 10-12
Figure 10-13
Figure 10-14
Figure 10-15
Figure 10-16
Figure 10-17
Figure 10-18
Figure 10-19
Figure 10-20
Figure 10-21
Figure 10-22
Figure 10-23
Figure 10-24
Figure 10-25
Figure 10-26
Figure 11-1
Figure 11-2
Figure 11-3
Figure 11-4
Figure 11-5
Figure 11-6
Figure 11-7
Figure 11-8
338
The ASTM E164 IIW type calibration block (P/N: TB7541-1) .................... 181
The IIW type 2 reference block (P/N: TB5939-1) ......................................... 182
The distance and sensitivity calibration (DSC) test block (P/N: TB7549-1)
............................................................................................................................. 183
The ASTM E164 IIW type metric calibration block (P/N: TB1054-2) ........ 184
The ISO 7963 MAB calibration block (P/N: TB1065-1) ............................... 185
The Navships cylindrical reflector block (P/N: TB7567-1) ......................... 185
The 5-step precision thickness calibration block (P/N: 2214E) .................. 186
The File menu parameters .............................................................................. 192
The Create setup page ..................................................................................... 193
File name edit ................................................................................................... 194
Creating advanced file type ........................................................................... 195
Advanced (Create page two) .......................................................................... 196
The Open page ................................................................................................. 198
ID of open file in the live screen .................................................................... 198
The Details page ............................................................................................... 199
Viewing file content (waveform) ................................................................... 200
Viewing file content (setup) ........................................................................... 201
Select ID page ................................................................................................... 202
File measurement summary ........................................................................... 203
The Recall setup menu .................................................................................... 204
Memo setup page ............................................................................................. 205
Memo Dictionary page ................................................................................... 206
Populated Memo setup page ......................................................................... 207
The Select ID menu .......................................................................................... 208
The Manage menu parameters ...................................................................... 209
Export setup page ............................................................................................ 211
Import page ...................................................................................................... 212
Import (memo) page ........................................................................................ 213
The Edit setup menu ....................................................................................... 214
The Copy setup menu ..................................................................................... 215
The Delete setup menu ................................................................................... 216
Grid controls in the live screen ...................................................................... 219
Grid controls in Contents screen ................................................................... 220
The Option key entry dialog box ................................................................... 226
The DAC/TCG setup page .............................................................................. 228
First DAC setup step ....................................................................................... 229
DAC Setup one point ...................................................................................... 230
Partial DAC curve with each echo set to 80 % FSH .................................... 231
The completed DAC curve ............................................................................. 232
Completed DAC curves in TCG view mode ............................................... 233
A small range DAC .......................................................................................... 234
List of Figures
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Figure 11-9
Figure 11-10
Figure 11-11
Figure 11-12
Figure 11-13
Figure 11-14
Figure 11-15
Figure 11-16
Figure 11-17
Figure 11-18
Figure 11-19
Figure 11-20
Figure 11-21
Figure 11-22
Figure 11-23
Figure 11-24
Figure 11-25
Figure 11-26
Figure 11-27
Figure 11-28
Figure 11-29
Figure 11-30
Figure 11-31
Figure 11-32
Figure 11-33
Figure 11-34
Figure 11-35
Figure 11-36
Figure 11-37
Figure 11-38
Figure 11-39
Figure 11-40
Figure 11-41
Figure 11-42
Figure 11-43
Figure 11-44
Figure 11-45
Figure 11-46
Figure 11-47
Figure 11-48
Figure 11-49
Standard DAC with 3 dB scanning gain ......................................................
DAC with 3 dB scan gain - reference correction active ..............................
DAC curves with adjusted gain ....................................................................
Custom DAC setup .........................................................................................
Completed custom DAC ................................................................................
DGS/AVG setup page ......................................................................................
Reference-reflector before capture ................................................................
DGS/AVG curves on screen ............................................................................
Gain curve adjusted DGS ...............................................................................
AWS setup page ...............................................................................................
Reference B value before storage ...................................................................
Active AWS with D rating ..............................................................................
Completed API 5UE sizing ............................................................................
Waveform averaging option setup ................................................................
Calibration data in collect mode ....................................................................
The Inspect mode .............................................................................................
Storing the Amax point ....................................................................................
Storing the T1 point .........................................................................................
Storing the T2 point .........................................................................................
Waveform Averaging option setup ...............................................................
The Waveform Averaging screen ..................................................................
Update rate less than 60 Hz ...........................................................................
Activating the BEA ..........................................................................................
Adjusting back wall gain ................................................................................
Setting the material velocity ...........................................................................
Setting the gate interface run mode ..............................................................
Interface gate and TCG ...................................................................................
Corrosion Module screen ...............................................................................
Corrosion Module grid view .........................................................................
Corrosion Module transducer Setup menu .................................................
Incorrectly triggered measurement ..............................................................
Corrosion Module AGC set to Off ................................................................
Adjusting the Corrosion Module gain value ...............................................
Corrosion Module echo measurement .........................................................
Echo measurement error ................................................................................
B-scan menu item ............................................................................................
B-Scan setup page ............................................................................................
B-scan position indicator ................................................................................
B-scan display in the Data Logger ................................................................
Template setup page .......................................................................................
-A- indicates an active template ....................................................................
List of Figures
235
236
237
239
240
242
245
246
248
251
252
253
256
257
259
260
262
263
264
266
267
268
269
270
272
273
274
277
278
279
281
282
283
284
285
287
289
290
291
293
294
339
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Figure 11-50
Figure 11-51
Figure 12-1
Figure 13-1
Figure 13-2
Figure 13-3
340
Stored template display in live screen ..........................................................
Template setup page ........................................................................................
Removing the lithium-ion battery .................................................................
2-D matrix grid .................................................................................................
One grid for 75 identical parts .......................................................................
Different named grid for each part ...............................................................
List of Figures
295
296
298
314
315
316
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
List of Tables
Table 1
Table 2
Table 3
Table 4
Table 5
Table 6
Table 7
Table 8
Table 9
Table 10
Table 11
Table 12
Table 13
Table 14
Table 15
Table 16
Table 17
Table 18
Table 19
Table 20
Table 21
Table 22
Table 23
Table 24
Table 25
Table 26
Table 28
Table 27
Table 29
Table 30
Rating label and regulatory screen content ......................................................... 3
Serial number label content ................................................................................... 4
English direct-access key descriptions ............................................................... 29
EPOCH 650 power status indicators .................................................................. 47
Filter cutoffs ........................................................................................................... 57
Button types ........................................................................................................... 74
Flag description ..................................................................................................... 79
Content of the first menu group ......................................................................... 83
Content of the second menu group .................................................................... 84
Content of the third menu group ........................................................................ 84
Content of the fourth menu group ..................................................................... 84
Content of the fifth menu group ......................................................................... 85
Available measurement readings ........................................................................ 92
Advanced filters .................................................................................................. 112
General specifications ......................................................................................... 301
Environmental ratings specifications ............................................................... 302
Pulser specifications ............................................................................................ 303
Receiver specifications ........................................................................................ 303
Calibration specifications ................................................................................... 303
Gate specifications .............................................................................................. 304
Measurement specifications .............................................................................. 304
Input/output specifications ................................................................................ 305
EPOCH 650 15-pin digital port output ............................................................ 305
EPOCH 650 15-pin VGA port output ............................................................... 306
Ultrasonic velocities in a variety of common materials ................................. 307
Example of start ID# = ABC123 ......................................................................... 312
Example of starting ID# = XYZ1267 .................................................................. 313
Example of start ID# = XY-GY ........................................................................... 313
Example of 2-D matrix grid with custom point .............................................. 317
Example of 3-D grid ............................................................................................ 318
List of Tables
341
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Table 31
Table 32
Table 33
Table 34
Table 35
342
Example of a BOILER file ...................................................................................
Glossary ................................................................................................................
EPOCH 650 basic kit (spares can be purchased) ............................................
EPOCH 650 software options ............................................................................
EPOCH 650 optional accessories .......................................................................
List of Tables
319
321
331
332
332
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Index
Numerics
2-D matrix grid 314
A
about page 98
AC
charger/adaptor 45
power connector 20
activating
peak hold 118
peak memory 117
software options 225
zoom 132
adjusting
damping 109
filter 112
gain 55
PRF value 108
pulser energy 108
pulser frequency 111
pulser waveform 110
rectification 113
system sensitivity 55, 105
test mode 110
alarm
gate 133, 134, 135
indications 61
indicators 33
through digital out connector 62
analog outputs 139
angle beam calibration 67, 145, 165
API 5UE software option 254
activation 256
crack sizing 259
envelope mode 258
manual mode 261
ASTM E164 IIW Type calibration block 181
attenuator, back wall echo 268
Australia, RCM compliance 3
auto measurement reading use 144
AUTO XX% feature 54, 62, 105, 106, 152, 170
AWS D1.1 software option 249
activating 250
calculating A and C values 254
scanning gain 253
B
back wall echo attenuator 268
basic calibration setup 143
basic gate parameters 58
battery
charge status 47
charger warning 45
compartment 20, 40
lithium-ion 40, 44
performance 44, 108
beam index point (BIP)
locating 165
peak memory 166
BNC
transducer connector 2, 20, 33, 34
C
calibrating
depth distance 176
echo-to-echo mode 162
sensitivity 173
sound path distance 169
using a delay line transducer 151
Index
343
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
using a dual element transducer 157
using an angle beam transducer (UT) 165
calibration 62
angle beam 67
annual 299
basic setup 143
blocks 181
files 68
measurement 62
modes 144
angle beam 145
straight beam 145, 146
specifications 303
calibration block
ASTM E164 IIW type 181
DSC 183
five-step 186
IIW Type 2 182
ISO 7963 185
NAVSHIPS 185
CAUTION signal word 8
cautions
AC power cord usage 45
closing protective cover 35, 36, 38
electric shock risk 2
tampering with the instrument 7
using incompatible equipment 6
CE symbol 4, 11
charger/adaptor, AC 45
cleaning instrument 298
compartment
battery 20
microSD card slot 38
USB connector 38
compliance
RCM (Australia) 3
connector
AC power 20
BNC transducer 2, 20, 33, 34
digital out 34
LEMO transducer 2, 34
protective cover 35, 36
RS-232/Alarms 37
transmit/receive 34
USB 20, 38
VGA Out 36, 37
344
Index
curved surface correction 180
D
DAC/TCG software option 226
activating 227
curve adjustment gain 236
custom DAC curves 238
gain adjustment 234
JIS DAC mode 238
transfer correction 237
damping, adjustment 109
DANGER signal word 7
data logger
file
last ID 207
menu 205
quick recall 204
select ID 207
types 188
grid view 217
activating 217
configuring 217
using the grid 218
manage
copy 214
delete 215
edit 213
export 210
import 211
import memo 216
reset 209
saving data 190
screen capture 221
storage capacity 190
video record 221
activating 221
using 221
date, internal clock 99
delay line transducer, calibrating using a 151
depth distance, calibrating 176
DGS/AVG software option 240
activation 241
curve adjustment options 246
curve completing setup 244
curve gain 247
registration level 248
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
relative attenuation 249
transfer correction 246
digital measurements, viewing 130
digital out connector 34
digital receiver filters 111
direct current symbol 3
direct-access keypad 21
display
flags and markers 78
freeze function 118
grid modes 119
protection 299
setup page 89
door, side 20
DSC test block 183
dual element transducer, calibrating using a 157
dual transducer thickness measurement 157
E
echo-to-echo
measurements 130
mode, calibrating 162
EMC directive 12
environmental ratings 302
equipment disposal 11
F
file types, data logger 188
files, calibration 68
filter
adjusting 112
digital receiver 111
standard set 112
first back-wall echo gating, note 153
first signal saturation, tip 163
five-step test block 186
flags 78
flank mode 80, 127
front panel user interface 19
frozen front panel keys 299
function keys 21, 31
G
gain
adjustment 55
reference 55
gate
alarm 133
basic parameters 58
conventional UT mode 123
measurement 1 and 2 123
measurement modes 126
specifications 304
tracking measurements 130
Gate 1 menu 59
Gate 2 menu 59
gate alarm
audible 133
minimum depth 134
minimum depth with gate tracking 135
minimum depth with single gate 134
threshold 133
Gate Setup menu 59
gates 58
GATES key, note 126
General setup page 96
general warning symbol 7
glossary 321
grid mode 119
leg 121
sound path 121
standard 121
grid view
activating 217
configuring 217
using the grid 218
grid, 2-D matrix 314
group of menus 49
H
hardware
about setup page 98
overview 19
high voltage warning symbol 7
I
IIW Type 1 V1 test block 184
IIW Type 2 reference block 182
IMPORTANT signal word 8
indication in gate, note 130
indicators
alarm 32, 33
power 32, 43
input/output specifications 305
installing lithium-ion battery 297
Index
345
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
instrument
cleaning 298
front panel 20
knob configuration 22
navigation pad 25
optional accessories 332
stand 41
interface gate software option
adjusting 271
compatibility 274
measurements and alarms 275
run mode 272
software options
interface gate 271
international symbol 24, 27
ISO 7963 block 185
K
keypad
direct-access 21
key descriptions 29
keys
function 21, 31
LOCK 54
NEXT GROUP 54
ON/OFF 43
parameter 21, 31
knob configuration 22
Korea Communications Commission (KCC) 3,
12
L
labels
rating 1
serial number 4
leg grid mode 121
LEMO transducer connector 2, 34
lithium-ion battery 40, 44, 297
locating beam index point (BIP) 165
LOCK key 54
M
managing special waveform functions 115
markers 78
measurement
calibration 62
echo-to-echo 130
gate tracking 130
346
Index
gates 1 and 2 123
readings 92
specifications 304
membrane vent 3, 20, 40
menu contents 82
menus 49, 73
Gate 1 59
Gate 2 59
Gate Setup 59
group of 49
pulser 56
Rcvr 56
metric units in calibrations 146
metric units, note 151, 157, 169, 176
microSD
card slot 39
microSD card
slot 38
modes, calibration 144
N
navigation pad 25
NAVSHIPS cylindrical reflector block 185
NEXT GROUP key 54
note
basic velocity parameter 132
charging the battery 44
debug button authorized use 102
differing component details 6
first back-wall echo gating 153
gate tracking 130
GATES key 126
incremental file creation 69
indication in gate 130
membrane vent 40
metric units 151, 157, 169, 176
metric units in calibrations 146
minimum depth alarm availability 135
overwriting EPOCH 650 data 101
peak memory and RF mode 117
PerfectSquare technology 110
reject function and RF mode 115
result variation 111
RF mode not active 113
sensitivity 110 dB 105
single shot instrument 108
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
spike pulse equivalence 56
thin material and transducer frequency 146
through transmission transit time 110
zoom on/off 59
NOTE signal word 8
O
Olympus technical support 14
ON/OFF key 43
optional accessories 332
options, software 332
output, analog 139
overview, hardware 19
P
package content 16
parameter keys 21, 31
parameters 49, 73
basic gate 58
parts list 331
peak hold
activating 118
function 118
peak memory
activating 117
function 116
function and RF mode, note 117
tip 168, 174, 176
PerfectSquare technology, note 110
pipe stand 20
power indicator 43, 47
power key 43
PRF
adjustment method, selecting 107
value, adjusting 108
product description 15
protective connector cover 35, 36
pulse repetition frequency (PRF) 107
pulser
adjusting frequency 111
adjusting waveform 110
adjustments 107
energy, adjusting 108
menu 56
settings 55
specifications 303
R
rating label 1
RCM mark 3
Rcvr menu 56
Reading setup page 91
receiver 56
adjustment 111
settings 55
specifications 303
recorder, video 221
rectification adjustment 113
Ref B value, storing 252
reference gain 55, 106
refracted angle, verifying 167
reject function 115
reject function and RF mode, note 115
result variation, note 111
RF mode, note 113
RoHS symbol 4, 12
RS-232/Alarms connector 37
S
safety
battery precautions 10
CAUTION signal word 8
DANGER signal word 7
electrical warnings 10
EMC directive 12
FCC (USA) compliance 13
general warnings 9
proper use of instrument 5, 6, 7
WARNING signal word 8
safety notices
cautions
AC power cord usage 45
closing protective cover 35, 36, 38
electric shock risk 2
warnings
battery charger 45
intended use 5
saturation of first signal, tip 163
saving data to data logger 190
scanning gain 106
screen capture 221
selecting PRF adjustment method 107
sensitivity calibration 173
Index
347
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
serial number label 4
serial number location 2
settings
pulser 55
receiver 55
setup page 89
side door 20
signal words
CAUTION 8
DANGER 7
IMPORTANT 8
NOTE 8
TIP 8
WARNING 8
single shot instrument, note 108
slot, microSD 38, 39
software options 332
activating 225
back wall echo attenuator 268
DAC/TCG 226
licensed and unlicensed features 225
sound path
distance, calibrating 169
grid mode 121
specifications 301
calibration 303
gates 304
measurements 304
pulser 303
receiver 303
stand, pipe 20
standard filter set 112
standard grid mode 121
status menu 98
storing Ref B value 252
straight beam modes 145, 146
submenus 54
support information, technical 14
symbols
CE 4, 11
direct current 3
general warning 7
high voltage warning 7
international 24, 27
Korean standard 3
membrane vent 3
348
Index
RCM (Australia) 3
RoHS 4, 12
WEEE 3, 11
system sensitivity adjustment 55, 105
T
technical support 14
test block 181, 184
test mode, adjusting 110
thin material and transducer frequency, note
146
thumb screws, battery compartment cover 40
time, internal clock 99
time-of-flight mode 132
TIP signal word 8
tips
auto measurement reading use 144
AUTO XX% feature 152
first signal saturation 163
peak memory 168, 174, 176
TOF time-of-flight 132
transit time, through transmission 110
transmit/receive connectors 34
trouble shooting 299
U
ultrasonic velocity in materials 307
USB client port 38
USB connector 38
user interface, front panel 19
V
velocity in materials 307
vent, membrane 20
verifying
o-ring gaskets and seals 298
refracted angle 167
VGA Out connector 36, 37
video record 221
activating 221
using 221
viewing digital measurements 130
W
WARNING signal word 8
warnings
battery charger 45
intended use 5
warranty information 13
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
Waveform Averaging software option 265
waveform rectification 113
WEEE symbol 3, 11
Z
zoom, activating 132
Index
349
DMTA-10055-01EN, Rev. A, February 2015
350
Index
Download PDF
Similar pages